Explanations and justifications in Israeli mathematics textbooks and ...
-
Upload
khangminh22 -
Category
Documents
-
view
1 -
download
0
Transcript of Explanations and justifications in Israeli mathematics textbooks and ...
Thesis for the degree
Doctor of Philosophy
Submitted to the Scientific Council of the
Weizmann Institute of Science
Rehovot, Israel
עבודת גמר )תזה( לתואר
דוקטור לפילוסופיה
למועצה המדעית שלמוגשת
מכון ויצמן למדע
רחובות, ישראל
By
Boaz Silverman
מאת
בועז זילברמן
בספרי לימוד במתמטיקה בישראל הסברים והצדקות
ותרומת ספר הלימוד לעיצוב הלמידה בכיתה
Explanations and justifications in Israeli mathematics textbooks
and the textbook's contribution to shaping classroom learning
Advisor:
Prof. Ruhama Even
מנחה:
פרופ' רוחמה אבן
July 2017 זע"שהת תמוז
Acknowledgements
To Prof. Ruhama Even, for your guidance, assistance, patience, and endless
devotion. Your precise observations have often left me in awe and pushed me to
improve myself and my work.
To Prof. Tommy Dreyfus and Prof. Edit Yerushalmy, for your ideas, support, and
thought-provoking criticism every step of the way.
To Dr. Michal Ayalon, Dr. Shai Olsher, Ayelet Gottlieb, and Anna Hoffman, for
being there with me (and for me) through and through.
To my families, near and far, past and present, blood and otherwise, for pushing me
forward, giving me love, and believing in me. I needed that.
And to my beloved Sydney Rachel, for being my partner, my equal, and my everything.
Table of Contents
List of Figures .................................................................................................................. i
List of Tables .................................................................................................................. v
Abstract .......................................................................................................................... 1
3 ............................................................................................................................... תקציר
1. Introduction .............................................................................................................. 5
2. Theoretical background ........................................................................................... 9
2.1. Justification and explanation in school mathematics ............................................. 9
2.1.1. Justification and explanation in mathematics education ............................... 9
2.1.2. Perceptions about justification and explanation in mathematics education 17
2.2. The role of textbooks in mathematics education .................................................. 19
2.2.1. The importance of textbooks in mathematics education ............................ 20
2.2.2. Justification and explanation in mathematics textbooks ............................. 21
3. Research questions ................................................................................................. 27
4. Methodology ........................................................................................................... 29
4.1. Part I: Justifications and explanations in Israeli 7th grade textbooks ................... 29
4.1.1. Sample selection ......................................................................................... 29
4.1.2. Data sources ................................................................................................ 30
4.1.3. Data analysis ............................................................................................... 31
4.2. Part II: The contribution of the textbook, teacher, and students to shaping
classroom justifications and explanations ............................................................ 34
4.2.1. Research design and participants ................................................................ 34
4.2.2. Data sources ................................................................................................ 37
4.2.3. Data analysis ............................................................................................... 39
5. Types of justification in the textbooks .................................................................. 43
5.1. The types of justification offered ......................................................................... 44
5.2. Types of justification across textbooks ................................................................ 48
5.3. Types of justification across mathematical statements ........................................ 50
5.4. Sequences of types of justification ....................................................................... 52
6. Justification strategies in the textbooks ............................................................... 55
6.1. Equivalent expressions ......................................................................................... 55
6.2. Division by zero ................................................................................................... 59
6.3. Distributive law .................................................................................................... 62
6.4. Equivalent equations ............................................................................................ 66
6.5. Product of negatives ............................................................................................. 71
6.6. Area of a trapezium .............................................................................................. 76
6.7. Area of a disk ....................................................................................................... 79
6.8. Vertical angles ...................................................................................................... 82
6.9. Corresponding angles ........................................................................................... 85
6.10. Angle sum of a triangle ........................................................................................ 89
6.11. Summary .............................................................................................................. 94
7. Paths of justification in Lena's classes ................................................................. 98
7.1. Equivalent equations ............................................................................................ 99
7.2. Area of a trapezium ............................................................................................ 102
7.3. Vertical angles .................................................................................................... 108
7.4. Angle sum of a triangle ...................................................................................... 112
7.5. Area of a disk ..................................................................................................... 115
7.6. Summary ............................................................................................................ 120
8. Paths of justification in Millie's classes .............................................................. 123
8.1. Equivalent equations .......................................................................................... 124
8.2. Product of negatives ........................................................................................... 126
8.3. Vertical angles .................................................................................................... 131
8.4. Corresponding angles ......................................................................................... 134
8.5. Area of a disk ..................................................................................................... 137
8.6. Summary ............................................................................................................ 141
9. Discussion .............................................................................................................. 143
References .................................................................................................................. 155
Appendix – Interview items ..................................................................................... 172
List of publications .................................................................................................... 177
Declaration................................................................................................................. 178
| i
List of Figures
Figure 1. Instances of justification – area of a trapezium (Textbook B, v.2, pp. 195-196) .................. 31
Figure 2. Paths of justification for the area of a trapezium (in Textbooks B and F) ............................ 33
Figure 3. The research design for part II of this study .......................................................................... 34
Figure 4. A set of paths of justification for product of negatives (Interview item)............................... 39
Figure 5. Outline of the teaching sequence for area of a trapezium in Lena's classes ......................... 40
Figure 6. Experimental demonstration by Dissection (Screenshot in Class L1) .................................. 41
Figure 7. Concordance of a rule with a model by Dissection (Screenshot in Class L2) ...................... 41
Figure 8. Appeal to authority (adapted from Textbook G, vol 2, pp. 61-62) ........................................ 44
Figure 9. Experimental demontration (Textbook B, vol 3, p.161)........................................................ 45
Figure 10. Concordance of a rule with a model (Textbook D, vol 2, p. 186) ....................................... 45
Figure 11. Deduction using a model (Textbook H, vol 3, p. 55) .......................................................... 46
Figure 12. Deduction using a specific case (Textbook B, vol 2, p. 195) .............................................. 46
Figure 13. Deduction using a general case (Textbook B, vol 2, p. 196) .............................................. 47
Figure 14. Relative frequencies of the types of justification in the textbooks, by category ................. 48
Figure 15. Frequencies of types of justification by topic and textbook ................................................ 50
Figure 16. Deduction using a specific case by Rules & conventions (Textbook D, vol 1, p. 43) ......... 55
Figure 17. Deduction using a specific case by Rules & conventions (Textbook A, vol 1, p. 188) ....... 56
Figure 18. Experimental demonstration by Substitution (Textbook A, vol 1, p. 26) ............................ 56
Figure 19. Deduction using a model by Description equivalence (Textbook C, vol 1, p. 57) .............. 57
Figure 20. Equivalent expressions – Paths of justification ................................................................... 58
Figure 21. Deduction using a specific case by Inverse of multiplication (Textbook B, vol 1, p. 80) ... 59
Figure 22. Deduction using a specific case by Inverse of multiplication (Textbook F, vol 1, p. 31) ... 60
Figure 23. Deduction using a a model by Repeated subtraction (Textbook A, vol 1, p. 64) ............... 60
Figure 24. Division by zero – Paths of justification .............................................................................. 61
Figure 25. Deduction using a model by Area (Textbook D, vol 1, p. 75) ............................................. 62
Figure 26. Deduction using a model by Array (Textbook E, vol 1, p. 96) ........................................... 63
Figure 27. Concordance of a rule with a model by Arith. conventions (Textbook E, vol 1, p. 97) ...... 63
Figure 28. Concordance of a rule with a model by Arith. conventions (Textbook B, vol 1, p. 72) ...... 63
Figure 29. Distributive law – Paths of justification .............................................................................. 65
Figure 30. Deduction using a model by Balance model (Textbook H, vol 3, p. 55)............................. 66
Figure 31. Experimental demonstration by Undoing (adapted from Textbook B, vol 2, p. 17) ........... 67
Figure 32. Concordanceof a rule w/ model by intuition (adapted from Textbook F, vol 2, p. 135) ..... 68
ii |
Figure 33. Experimental demonstration by intuition (adapted from Textbook D, vol 2, p. 15) ........... 68
Figure 34. Deduction using a model by Segment model (Textbook A, vol 1, p. 214) .......................... 69
Figure 35. Equivalent equations – Paths of justification. ..................................................................... 70
Figure 36. Deduction using a specific case by Discovering patterns (Textbook C, vol 2, p. 42) ........ 71
Figure 37. Deduction using a specific case by Discovering patterns (Textbook H, vol 2, p. 46) ........ 72
Figure 38. Appeal to authority by Discov. patterns (adapted from Textbook G, v. 2, pp. 61-62) ........ 72
Figure 39. Deduction using a specific case by Extension of properties (Textbook F, vol 2, p. 48) ..... 73
Figure 40. Deduction using a model by Line model (adapted from Textbook A, vol 2, p. 392) .......... 73
Figure 41. Deduction using a model by Line model (Textbook A, vol 2, p. 395) ................................ 73
Figure 42. A mnemonic relying on Double negation (Textbook A, vol 2, p. 394) ............................... 74
Figure 43. Product of negatives – Paths of justification ....................................................................... 75
Figure 44. Experimental demonstration by Dissection (Textbook D, vol 2, p.184) ............................. 76
Figure 45. Deduction using a general case by Construction (Textbook G, vol 3, p.93) ...................... 77
Figure 46. Area of a trapezium – Paths of justification ........................................................................ 78
Figure 47. Deduction using a general case by Dissection into sectors (Textbook G, part 3, p. 118) .. 79
Figure 48. Deduction using a general case by Dissection into rings (Textbook F, vol 2, p. 223) ....... 80
Figure 49. Area of a disk – Paths of justification .................................................................................. 81
Figure 50. Deduction using a general case by Supplementary angles (Textbook F, vol 3, p. 136) ..... 82
Figure 51. Experimental demonstration by Measurement (Textbook F, vol 3, p. 136) ........................ 83
Figure 52. Vertical angles – Paths of justification ................................................................................ 84
Figure 53. Experimental demonstration by Measurement (Textbook G, vol 2, p. 182) ....................... 85
Figure 54. Experimental demonstration by Measurement (adapted from Textbook C, vol 2, p. 189) . 86
Figure 55. Deduction using a specific case by Alternate angles (Textbook H, vol 2, p. 231) .............. 86
Figure 56. Corresponding angles – Paths of justification..................................................................... 88
Figure 57. Deduction using a general case by Parallel line (Textbook C, vol 3, p. 173) .................... 89
Figure 58. Experimental demonstration by Angle rearrangement (Textbook B, vol 3, p. 161) ........... 90
Figure 59. Experimental demonstration by Angle rearrangement (Textbook B, vol 3, p. 161) ........... 90
Figure 60. Deduction using a general case by Right triangle (Textbook D, vol 3, p. 135).................. 90
Figure 61. Deduction using a general case by Right triangle (Textbook A, vol 3, p. 647).................. 91
Figure 62. Experimental demonstration by Measurement (Textbook H, vol 3, p. 167) ....................... 91
Figure 63. Experimental demonstration by Measurement (adapted from Textbook H, vol 3, p. 167) . 91
Figure 64. Deduction using a general case by Parallel line & extension (Textbook A, vol 3, p. 621) 92
Figure 65. Angle sum of a triangle – Paths of justification ................................................................... 93
Figure 66. Common sequences of justification strategies in the textbooks and the Israeli curriculum 97
| iii
Figure 67. Paths of justification in Lena's classes for Equivalent equations ........................................ 99
Figure 68. Balance model (Textbook C, vol 3, p. 54) ......................................................................... 100
Figure 69. Balance model – limitations (Textbook C, vol 3, p. 58) .................................................... 100
Figure 70. Balance model (screenshots in Class L1 [a] and Class L2 [b]) ......................................... 101
Figure 71. Paths of justification in Lena's classes for Area of a trapezium ........................................ 103
Figure 72. Dissection (Textbook C, vol 2, p. 112) .............................................................................. 103
Figure 73. Dissection and Construction (Textbook C, vol 2, p. 112) ................................................. 103
Figure 74. Deduction using a general case (Textbook C, vol 2, p. 112) ............................................ 104
Figure 75. Dissection (screenshots in Class L1 [a] and Class L2 [b]) ................................................ 104
Figure 76. Derivation of the area formula of a trapezium in a specific case ...................................... 105
Figure 77. The deductive process in Class L2 [a], replaced by giving the rule [b] ............................ 105
Figure 78. Concordance of a rule with a model (screenshot in Class L2) .......................................... 106
Figure 79. Derivation of the area formula of a trapezium in a specific case ...................................... 106
Figure 80. Deduction using a specific case (screenshots in Class L1 [a] and Class L2 [b])............... 107
Figure 81. Paths of justification in Lena's classes for Vertical angles ................................................ 109
Figure 82. Vertical angles – deduction using a specific case (Textbook C, vol 2, p. 184) ................. 109
Figure 83. Vertical angles – deduction using a general case (Textbook C, vol 2, p. 184) ................. 109
Figure 84. Vertical angles (screenshot in Class L1) ........................................................................... 110
Figure 85. A set of paths of justification for vertical angles (interview item). ................................... 111
Figure 86. Paths of justification in Lena's classes for Angle sum of a triangle ................................... 112
Figure 87. Angle sum of a triangle – Angle rearrangement (Textbook C, vol 3, p. 172) ................... 113
Figure 88. Angle sum of a triangle – Parallel line (adapted from Textbook C, vol 3, p. 173) ............ 113
Figure 89. Angle sum of a triangle – Parallel line (Textbook C, vol 3, p. 173) .................................. 113
Figure 90. Paths of justification in Lena's classes for Area of a disk .................................................. 116
Figure 91. Area of a disk – Dissection into sectors (Textbook C, part 3, p. 156) ............................... 116
Figure 92. Area of a disk – the circumference and the area (Textbook C, part 3, p. 156) .................. 117
Figure 93. A set of paths of justification for area of a disk (interview item) ..................................... 118
Figure 94. Paths of justification in Lena's classes, by statement ........................................................ 120
Figure 95. Paths of justification in Millie's classes for Equivalent equations .................................... 124
Figure 96. Balance model (screenshot in Class M2) .......................................................................... 125
Figure 97. Paths of justification in Millie's classes for Product of negatives ..................................... 127
Figure 98. Product of negatives – Discovering patterns (Textbook C, vol 2, pp. 42-43) ................... 127
Figure 99. Product of negatives – Extension of properties (Textbook C, vol 2, p. 44) ...................... 128
Figure 100. Discovering patterns (screenshots in Class M1 [a] and Class M2 [b]) ........................... 129
iv |
Figure 101. A set of paths of justification for product of negatives (Interview item)......................... 130
Figure 102. Paths of justification in Millie's classes for Vertical angles ............................................ 132
Figure 103. Vertical angles – supplementary angles (screenshot in Class M1) ................................. 132
Figure 104. Paths of justification in Millie's classes for Corresponding angles ................................. 135
Figure 105. Corresponding angles – measurement (Textbook C, vol 2, p. 189) ................................ 135
Figure 106. Corresponding angles – measurement (adapted from Textbook C, vol 2, p. 189) .......... 135
Figure 107. Measurement (screenshot in Class M1 [a] and Class M2 [b]) ......................................... 136
Figure 108. Paths of justification in Millie's classes for Area of a disk .............................................. 138
Figure 109. Area of a disk – Dissection (screenshot in Class M1) ..................................................... 139
Figure 110. Area of a disk – Dissection (screenshot in Class M2) ..................................................... 139
Figure 111. A set of paths of justification for area of a disk (interview item). .................................. 140
Figure 112. Grid with Concordance of a rule with a model (screenshots in Class M1) ..................... 140
Figure 113. Paths of justification in Millie's classes, by statement ..................................................... 141
| v
List of Tables
Table 1. General characteristics of the analysed textbooks .................................................................. 29
Table 2. Types of justification, by categories (adapted from: Stacey & Vincent, 2009). ..................... 32
Table 3. Duration of observed lesson sections by classroom (in minutes and percentages) ................. 36
Table 4. Number of lesson observations, by classroom and mathematical statement .......................... 37
Table 5. Frequencies of instances of justifications, by textbook section .............................................. 43
Table 6. Frequencies of types of justification, by textbook .................................................................. 49
Table 7. Average frequencies for types of justification, by textbook scope ......................................... 49
Table 8. Frequencies of types of justification, by mathematical statement .......................................... 51
Table 9. Paths of justification formed by types of justification, by textbook and statement. ............... 53
Table 10. Average path lengths, by statement and textbook scope....................................................... 54
Table 11. Equivalent expressions – frequencies of justification strategies, by textbook ...................... 57
Table 12. Division by zero – frequencies of justification strategies, by textbook. ................................ 60
Table 13. Distributive law – frequencies of justification strategies, by textbook. ................................ 64
Table 14. Equivalent equations – frequencies of justification strategies, by textbook ......................... 70
Table 15. Product of negatives – frequencies of justification strategies, by textbook .......................... 74
Table 16. Area of a trapezium – frequencies of justification strategies, by textbook ........................... 77
Table 17. Area of a disk – frequencies of justification strategies, by textbook .................................... 81
Table 18. Vertical angles – frequencies of justification strategies, by textbook .................................. 83
Table 19. Corresponding angles – frequencies of justification strategies, by textbook ....................... 87
Table 20. Angle sum of a triangle – frequencies of justification strategies, by textbook ..................... 92
Table 21. Number of justification strategies per path, by statement and textbook. .............................. 94
Table 22. Frequencies of justification strategies, by justification types ............................................... 95
1 | Abstract
Abstract
The study deals with explanation and justification in Israeli mathematics textbooks and with
the textbook’s contribution to shaping their learning in the classroom. The study comprises
two parts. The first part examines the opportunities offered in 7th grade Israeli textbooks for
students to learn how to explain and justify mathematical statements. The second examines
the ways in which the textbook, in conjunction with the teacher and the students, shape the
opportunities offered in 7th grade Israeli classrooms to learn how to explain and justify.
Part I of the study investigates the explanations and justifications offered in 7th grade
mathematics textbooks and the paths of justification – i.e., the sequences of justifications
each textbook offers for each mathematical statement. The data sources include the textbook
chapters introducing ten key mathematical statements, in eight Israeli 7th grade mathematics
textbooks (two of limited scope, intended for students with low achievements; six of
standard/expanded scope, intended for the general student population). Comparative analyses
of the paths of justification, by textbook and by mathematical statement, focused on three
attributes: (1) path length – the number of instances of justification offered in a textbook for
each mathematical statement; (2) characteristics of the instances comprising each path –
justification types (a meta-level characteristic, following Stacey & Vincent, 2009) and
justification strategies (a content-specific characteristic, dealing with the specific warrant);
and (3) sequencing – the order in which justifications were offered in the textbook.
Part II of the study investigates the ways in which textbooks, in conjunction with the teacher
and the students, shape the opportunities offered in 7th grade mathematics classrooms. This
part of the study revolves around two case studies, each focused on a mathematics teacher
who uses the same textbook in two 7th grade classes. The data sources include 11-14 lesson
observations in each of the four classes (a total of 49 lessons) and teacher interviews.
Comparative analyses of the paths of justification, by teacher, by classroom, and by topic,
focused on three attributes: (1) path length, (2) characteristics, and (3) sequencing.
The findings of Part I reveal that the analyzed textbooks provided justification for all
analyzed statements (all but one statement in one textbook). Path lengths varied considerably
– where some textbooks offered long paths for a mathematical statement, other textbooks
offered rather short paths. Paths of justification typically comprised either deductive or
empirical justification types, whereas external types were extremely rare.
Abstract | 2
Three justification types were especially common – an empirical type (Experimental
demonstration) and two deductive types (Deduction using a specific/general case). However,
these types were distributed differently among mathematical topics and among textbooks of
different scopes: (1) Deduction using a general case, the justification type closest to a formal
proof, was included solely in geometry, while Deduction using a specific case (i.e., generic
examples) was used mostly in statements relying on an algebraic derivation; and (2)
Deduction using a general case was roughly three times more common in textbooks of
standard/expanded scope compared with textbooks of limited scope. The three most common
justification types were often similarly sequenced across textbooks and topics: paths that
involved both experimentation and a deductive process tended to offer the empirical type
before the deductive, and paths that involved deduction using both a generic example and the
general case tended to offer the specific case before the general.
Justification strategies were associated with justification types, yet the correspondence was
not one-to-one. In algebra statements, almost every justification strategy corresponded to a
single type across textbooks. In geometry, however, justification strategies often occurred
several times in paths of justification, with various justification types.
The findings of Part II suggest that the textbook contributed greatly to shaping the paths of
justification and was the main source for justifications in all observed classrooms. Paths of
justification in every class were generally similar to, yet typically shorter than, the paths
offered in the textbook – both in their characteristics and in their sequencing.
Additionally, the findings reveal that the teachers' perception of their students' abilities was
instrumental in constructing the paths of justifications in the classes. Instances of justification
were excluded if the teacher regarded them as too difficult in two cases: (1) the justification
type was deduction using a general case, and (2) the textbook marked them as intended for
high-achieving students. Additionally, noisy classroom environment interrupted several
discussions and contributed to altering a justification type from deductive to empirical.
This study focuses on textbooks that are currently in use and brings to light certain nontrivial
aspects: It maps the paths of justification offered for mathematical statements and
characterizes both the justification strategies and the corresponding justification types.
Additionally, the study discusses the contribution of the textbook to shaping classroom
learning of explanation and justification. This information is important for researchers,
educators, textbook authors, curriculum developers, and decision makers.
3 | Abstract
תקציר
הסברים בספרי מתמטיקה בישראל ובתרומת ספר הלימוד לעיצוב ההזדמנויות ללמידתם בהמחקר עוסק בהצדקות ו
בכיתה. הוא כולל שני חלקים. החלק הראשון בוחן את ההזדמנויות המוצעות לתלמידים בספרי לימוד לכיתה ז'
ת. החלק השני בוחן באילו אופנים ספר הלימוד, יחד עם בישראל ללמוד כיצד להצדיק ולהסביר אמירות מתמטיו
להצדיק ולהסביר.כיצד המורה והתלמידים, מעצבים את ההזדמנויות המוצעות בכיתות ז' בישראל ללמוד
האופנים – מהלכי ההצדקהחוקר את ההצדקות וההסברים המוצעים בספרי לימוד במתמטיקה לכיתה ז' ואת Iחלק
של אמירה מתמטית בספרי הלימוד. מקורות הנתונים כוללים את פרקי ותכל ההצדק ותומאורגנ ותשבהם מסודר
ספרי הלימוד המציגים עשר אמירות מתמטיות מרכזיות, בשמונה ספרי לימוד במתמטיקה לכיתה ז' )שניים בהיקף
למידים(. מצומצם, המיועדים לתלמידים בעלי הישגים נמוכים; שישה בהיקף רגיל/מורחב, המיועדים לכלל הת
ניתוחים השוואתיים של מהלכי ההצדקה, לפי ספר הלימוד ולפי האמירה המתמטית, התמקדו בשלושה היבטים:
בכל הצדקות( מאפייני ה2המוצעים בספר לימוד לכל אמירה מתמטית; ) ותמספר ההצדק –( אורך המהלך 1)
אסטרטגיות ההצדקה( וStacey & Vincent, 2009על, לפי המסגרת של -)מאפיין ברמת סוגי ההצדקה –מהלך
בספר הלימוד. ותסדר הצגת ההצדק –( רצף 3)-תוכן ותלוי אמירה(; ו-)מאפיין תלוי
חוקר את האופנים שבהם ספרי לימוד, יחד עם המורה והתלמידים, מעצבים את ההזדמנויות המוצעות IIחלק
אחד מהם מלמדת . חלק זה מורכב משני חקרי מקרה, שבכלללמוד להסביר ולהצדיק בשיעורי מתמטיקה בכיתות ז'
11-11-מורה מסוימת מתמטיקה בשתי כיתות ז' בעזרת אותו ספר לימוד. מקורות הנתונים כוללים תצפיות ב
שיעורים( וראיונות עם כל מורה. ניתוחים 14שיעורים בכל אחת מארבע הכיתות לאורך שנת הלימודים )סה"כ
טית, התמקדו בשלושה היבטים: אורך המהלך, השוואתיים של מהלכי ההצדקה, לפי מורה, כיתה, ואמירה מתמ
רצף.הבכל מהלך, ו הצדקותמאפייני ה
מראים כי ספרי הלימוד שנותחו מציעים הצדקות לכל האמירות שנותחו )פרט לאמירה אחת Iהממצאים של חלק
ת, חלק מספרי הלימוד הציעו מהלכים ארוכים לאמירה מתמטי –בספר אחד(. נמצאו הבדלים באורכי המהלכים
בעוד ספרי לימוד אחרים הציעו מהלכים קצרים למדי. בנוסף, מהלכי ההצדקה לרוב הכילו סוגי הצדקה אמפיריים
מתמטיים היו נדירים מאד. -או דדוקטיביים, בעוד סוגי הצדקה חוץ
רת הסקה בעז( ושני סוגים דדוקטיביים )הדגמה בהתנסותסוג אמפירי ) –שלושה סוגי הצדקה היו נפוצים במיוחד
(. עם זאת, נמצא הבדל בשכיחות של סוגים אלו בין נושאים מתמטיים שונים וכן בין ספרי לימוד כללי/ מקרה פרטי
, סוג ההצדקה הקרוב ביותר להוכחה פורמלית, הוצע הסקה בעזרת מקרה כללי( 1המיועדים לאוכלוסיות שונות: )
מא גנרית( היה נפוץ בעיקר באמירות המערבות )משמע, דוג הסקה בעזרת מקרה פרטיאך ורק בגיאומטריה, בעוד
בספרי לימוד בהיקף –בערך פי שלושה –היה שכיח יותר הסקה בעזרת מקרה כללי( 2)-מניפולציות אלגבריות; ו
רגיל/מורחב לעומת ספרי לימוד בהיקף מצומצם. סדר ההופעה של שלושת סוגי ההצדקה הנפוצים היה דומה בין
הלכים שכללו הן התנסות והן תהליך דדוקטיבי נטו להציע את הסוג האמפירי לפני הספרים ברוב האמירות: מ
גנרית והן בעזרת המקרה הכללי נטו להציע את -הדדוקטיבי, ומהלכים שכללו הסקה הן בעזרת דוגמה פרטית
המקרה הפרטי לפני הכללי.
Abstract | 4
ערכית. באלגברה, כמעט כל -חד-אסטרטגיות ההצדקה נמצאו קשורות לסוגי ההצדקה, אם כי ההתאמה לא היתה חד
אחת מאסטרטגיות ההצדקה התאימה לסוג הצדקה יחיד בכל ספרי הלימוד שנותחו. בגיאומטריה, לעומת זאת,
אסטרטגיות הצדקה הופיעו לעתים קרובות מספר פעמים במהלכי ההצדקה, בכל פעם עם סוגי הצדקה שונים.
הלימוד לעיצוב מהלכי ההצדקה. ספר הלימוד היה המקור מצביעים על תרומה רבה של ספר IIהממצאים של חלק
הן במאפייני –בכל הכיתות שנצפו, ומהלכי ההצדקה היו דומים למדי למהלכים שבספר הלימוד ותהמרכזי להצדק
אם כי היו קצרים יותר מאשר בספר. –כל הצדקה והן בסדר שלהם
תלמידיהן מילא תפקיד משמעותי בבניית מהלכי הממצאים מראים גם כי האופן שבו תפשו המורות את יכולות
הסקה ( סוג ההצדקה היה 1שנתפשו על ידי המורה כקשים מדי אם: ) ותההצדקה בכיתות. המורות לא כללו הצדק
לתלמידים מתקדמים. בנוסף, סביבת לימודים תבספר הלימוד כמיועד ההצדקה סומנה( 2)-, ובעזרת מקרה כללי
רועשת בכיתות הקשתה על קיום דיונים ואף תרמה לשינוי סוג הצדקה מדדוקטיבי לאמפירי.
מורים מלמדים בעזרתם. המחקר מציף ומציג מאפיינים שהמחקר מתמקד בספרי לימוד הנמצאים כעת בשימוש ו
המוצעים בספרי הלימוד לאמירות מתמטיות, ומאפיין הן שאינם מובנים מאליהם: הוא ממפה את מהלכי ההצדקה
את האמצעים המתמטיים שבהם נעשה שימוש והן את סוגי ההצדקה המתאימים. בנוסף, המחקר דן בתרומה של
ספר הלימוד לעיצוב הלמידה של הצדקות והסברים בכיתות. מידע זה חשוב לחוקרים, למורים, למחברי ספרי
ראה, ולמקבלי החלטות.לימוד, למפתחי חומרי הו
5 | Introduction
1. Introduction
In this chapter, I focus on three issues: (i) The background for this study, (ii) the research
goals, and (iii) the structure of this thesis.
1.1. Background
Explaining and justifying are the bread and butter of mathematics – the essential, sustaining
element. They are considered by many to be central components of doing and learning
mathematics (e.g., M. Ayalon & Even, 2010; Ball & Bass, 2003; Cabassut, 2005; Chazan,
1993; Schwarz, Hershkowitz, & Prusak, 2010; Yackel & Hanna, 2003). Their importance in
school mathematics is emphasized in the Israeli national junior high school curriculum (Israel
Ministry of Education, 2009), as well as in other curricula worldwide (e.g., Australian
Education Council, 1991; Common Core State Standards Initiative, 2010; Department of
Education, 2010; NCTM - National Council of Teachers of Mathematics, 2000).
Israel has a centralized educational system. School curricula are developed and regulated by
the Israeli Ministry of Education, and textbooks are published under authorization of the
Ministry. Approval of textbooks and learning resources to be used in schools involves several
necessary conditions: procedural (e.g., submission of proper documentation), technical (e.g.,
maximal page count), and pedagogical (e.g., curriculum adequacy and correspondence to
scientific-pedagogical quality criteria) (Israel Ministry of Education, 2015, sec. 6). The
adequacy of a textbook to the Israeli curriculum must be complete, and correspond to the
number of teaching hours that are specified in the curriculum, or the textbook is categorically
rejected and returned to its developers.
In 2006 and 2009 the Israeli Ministry of Education launched new national elementary and
junior high school mathematics curricula (respectively). The junior high school curriculum,
intended for grades 7-9, underwent revisions since it was launched and was finally approved
in 2013. The new national high school curriculum is currently under development.
The Israeli junior high school curriculum (henceforth: Israeli curriculum) comprises three
strands: arithmetic, algebra, and geometry (Israel Ministry of Education, 2009). It maintains
and builds on the emphases in the elementary school national curriculum, and explicitly
emphasizes justification, explanation, and proof, as well as investigation, exploration,
problem solving, and the generation of mathematical conjectures. Moreover, it stresses these
aspects for both algebra and geometry.
Introduction | 6
In response to the introduction of the new school curriculum, several teams began developing
experimental curriculum materials (e.g., textbook series, teacher's guides, and online learning
resources). Eight parallel mathematics textbooks were approved in 2012 by the Ministry of
Education for use in Hebrew speaking 7th grade schools: six intended for the general student
population (standard/expanded scope) and two for students with low achievements (limited
scope). These 7th grade textbooks have been used in schools since the 2012/2013 school year,
8th grade textbooks were approved for use in the 2014/2015 school year, and 9th grade
textbooks were approved for use in the 2015/2016 school year.
A recent study investigated aspects of justification in the experimental edition of the new
mathematics textbooks. Dolev and Even (2013) examined the requests made by six 7th grade
textbooks for students to explain and justify their mathematical work, in two central topics in
the Israeli curriculum: equation solving in the algebra strand, and triangle properties in the
geometry strand. The findings revealed that larger percentages of these tasks were included in
the geometric topic, compared with the algebraic topic, in all six textbooks. In an M.Sc.
thesis, Dolev (2011) further analyzed the justifications offered for these mathematical topics
in the textbooks and found that in some cases, textbooks justified a statement using several
instances of justification.
Research suggests that in Israel and in several other countries, the textbooks used in class
considerably influence students’ opportunities to learn mathematics in general (e.g.,
Eisenmann & Even, 2011; Haggarty & Pepin, 2002; Shield & Dole, 2013; Van den Heuvel-
Panhuizen, 2000), and to explain and justify in particular (e.g., Ayalon & Even, 2016).
Accordingly, an increasing number of studies focus on the opportunities offered in
mathematics textbooks to learn to justify. Two lines of research are common in the literature:
(1) the justifications for mathematical statements presented in textbooks (e.g., Dolev, 2011;
Stacey & Vincent, 2009), and (2) the opportunities for students to explain and justify their
own mathematical work (e.g., Dolev & Even, 2013; Stylianides, 2009). The current study
belongs to the first of these two lines.
Textbook studies reveal a variety of explanations and justifications offered for mathematical
statements (e.g., Stacey & Vincent, 2009; Stylianides, 2009). Furthermore, in some cases,
textbooks offered multiple instances of justification for a single statement: either more than
one type of justification (e.g., both empirical and deductive types) or more than one instance
of the same type (Dolev, 2011; Stacey & Vincent, 2009).
7 | Introduction
This exposure to a multitude of explanations and justification for a single statement is likely
to have an additive effect on students: Some instances of justification may invoke previous
knowledge or experience, thereby serving a didactic goal (e.g., Sierpinska, 1994; Stacey &
Vincent, 2009); other instances may function as a catalyst or a trigger for making a conjecture
or for providing a more formal justification (e.g., J. D. Davis, Smith, Roy, & Bilgic, 2014;
Stylianides, 2009); and yet others might strengthen the conceptual basis for the mathematical
statement that is being explained or justified (Sierpinska, 1994). Therefore, in addition to
examining each individual instance of justification separately, it is important to attend to the
paths of justification – the ways in which instances of justification of one statement are
arranged, structured, and sequenced – an aspect that receives little attention in the literature.
Part I of this study examines the paths of justification for mathematical statements that are
offered in Israeli 7th grade mathematics textbooks. It focuses on the 7th grade because, as
described earlier, for this grade level: (1) the Israeli curriculum emphasizes justification and
explanation; and (2) in many Israeli schools, the 7th grade marks a transition from elementary
to junior high school, which involves a more deductive approach.
Previous studies suggest that textbooks are but one of several factors involved in shaping the
opportunities for students to learn how to explain and justify mathematical statements in the
classroom, such as teachers, students, and mathematical topics (e.g., M. Ayalon & Even,
2015; Even & Kvatinsky, 2010). Part II of this study examines this issue and focuses on the
contribution of the textbook, together with the teacher and the students, to learning to explain
and justify in class.
Two working hypotheses underlie this study: (i) Textbooks are instrumental in shaping Israeli
students' opportunities to learn to explain and justify (e.g., M. Ayalon & Even, 2016); and (ii)
These opportunities are shaped by the characteristics of several additional factors, such as the
teacher and the students (e.g., M. Ayalon & Even, 2015; Even & Kvatinsky, 2010).
1.2. Research goals
The study has two central research goals. First, by using a novel approach to textbook
justifications, which focuses on the paths of justification, this study aims to characterize the
opportunities offered in Israeli textbooks for students to learn how to explain and justify
mathematical statements. Second, in light of the joint contribution of several factors to
shaping these opportunities in classrooms, and by relying on the textbook analysis described
above, this study aims to examine the ways in which the textbook, in conjunction with the
Introduction | 8
teacher and the students, shape the opportunities offered in Israeli classrooms for students to
learn how to explain and justify.
1.3. Structure of the thesis
The dissertation comprises nine chapters and one appendix.
Chapter 2 reviews the literature relevant to the current study. The chapter comprises two
sections. The first section reviews the literature on the teaching and learning of school
mathematics, with a particular focus on explanation and justification. The second section
reviews the literature on the role of textbooks in mathematics education.
Chapter 3 presents the research questions for this study.
Chapter 4 describes the methodology for each of the two parts of the study, including the
research design, the sample selection, the participants in part II of the study (Lena and
Millie), the data sources, the conceptual framework, and the stages of data analysis.
Chapter 5 and Chapter 6 focus on findings related to my first research goal, dealing with the
opportunities offered to students in 7th grade Israeli mathematics textbooks to learn how to
explain and justify mathematical statements. Chapter 5 deals with results regarding the types
of justification offered in the textbooks, and Chapter 6 describes results regarding the
justification strategies offered in the textbooks.
Chapter 7 and Chapter 8 focus on findings related to my second research goal, dealing with
the ways in which the textbook, together with the teacher and the students, shape these
opportunities in the classroom. Each chapter focuses on one case study: Chapter 7 focuses on
Lena's classes and Chapter 8 on Millie's classes.
In Chapter 9 I discuss the results achieved in this study and present my conclusions based on
the findings. In addition, I discuss the implications of the study and its limitations.
9 | Theoretical background
2. Theoretical background
This study deals with justification and explanation (J&E) in Israeli mathematics textbooks
and with the contribution of the textbook to shaping the learning of J&E in the classroom.
Accordingly, this literature review comprises two parts.
The first part deals with J&E in school mathematics. It discusses two issues: J&E in
mathematics education and perceptions about J&E in mathematics education. The second part
is concerned with the role of textbooks in mathematics education and discusses two issues:
the importance of textbooks in mathematics education and J&E in mathematics textbooks.
2.1. Justification and explanation in school mathematics
2.1.1. Justification and explanation in mathematics education
Asking "Why is it true?" is a fundamental part of learning and doing mathematics, and is a
gateway to activities such as identifying patterns, generating conjectures, finding evidence
supporting or refuting the conjectures, evaluating arguments, and formally proving or
disproving conjectures (e.g., Hanna, Jahnke, & Pulte, 2010; Lakatos, 1976; Pólya, 1954).
A great emphasis is given to these concepts in the mathematics education literature. Some
studies have approached them theoretically (Blum & Kirsch, 1991; Cai & Cirillo, 2014;
Conner, Singletary, Smith, Wagner, & Francisco, 2014; Hanna, 2014; Harel & Sowder, 2007;
Kidron & Dreyfus, 2009; Peirce, 1878/1998; Schwarz, 2009; Sierpinska, 1994; Toulmin,
1958/2003; Werndl, 2009), some empirically (e.g., Bieda, Ji, Drwencke, & Picard, 2014;
Chazan, 1993; B. Davis & Simmt, 2006; J. D. Davis et al., 2014; Dolev, 2011; Dolev &
Even, 2013; Haggarty & Pepin, 2002; Senk, Thompson, & Johnson, 2008; Thompson, Senk,
& Johnson, 2012), and some combined the two approaches (e.g., Stacey & Vincent, 2009;
Stylianides, 2009).
Four issues are discussed below. First, the definitions used in these studies for J&E are not
consistent, and different authors assign different meanings to these concepts. Therefore, this
section begins with a short review of terminology. The second issue is a detailed review of
several conceptual frameworks suggested in the literature. The third issue involves the
different roles and types of J&E in mathematics education and in mathematics. The fourth
issue concerns J&E in the mathematics school curriculum.
Section 2.1 – Justification and explanation in school mathematics | 10
2.1.1.1. Background and review of terminology
A plethora of terms is used in the literature in the discussion of justification and explanation
activities. Among them are argumentation, warrant, reasoning, and proof. These terms are
close in meaning, yet their boundaries are ill-defined (Hanna, 2014).
Argumentation is a very inclusive concept, frequently used in the science teaching literature.
Some authors define it as a dialectical discourse, which involves putting forward propositions
in order to justify or refute a certain standpoint (van Eemeren, Grootendorst, & Henkemans,
1996). Others define it as a social process involving an adjustment of one's interpretations by
presenting their rationale verbally (Banegas, 2013; Krummheuer, 1995). Yet others define it
as involving skills such as making conjectures, testing their plausibility, justifying claims,
constructing a connected sequence of assertions (i.e., an argument), and evaluating arguments
(J. D. Davis et al., 2014; Hanna, 2014; Pólya, 1954; Umland & Sriraman, 2014).
A warrant is an essential part of an argument, which justifies the claim with given data.
Toulmin's (1958/2003) widely cited Argument Model identifies six elements as constituting
arguments: (1) Claim – a challenged statement; (2) Grounds – the premises, examples, data,
and facts used to support the claim; (3) Warrant – the (often implicit) logical connection
between the data and the claim; (4) Backing – an additional support, authority, and validation
to the warrant; (5) Qualifier – the certainty level of the claim (e.g., quite likely, presumably);
and (6) Rebuttal – circumstances under which the warrant is not valid (e.g., counterexamples
and special cases). When applied to mathematics education, several researchers modify the
argument by omitting or combining elements (e.g., Krummheuer, 1995; Prusak, Hershkowitz,
& Schwarz, 2012; Yackel, 2002), yet a growing number of authors argue for using the full
model (e.g., Conner et al., 2014; Inglis, Mejia-Ramos, & Simpson, 2007; Simpson, 2015).
Reasoning is closely related to argumentation, yet is more common in the mathematics
education literature. Reasoning has been defined by many authors. Some claim that the two
concepts – reasoning and argumentation – are one and the same when individual activities are
considered (e.g., Conner et al., 2014). Hanna (2014) defines it as the common human ability
to make inferences, Stylianides (2008a) regards it as a set of activities involved in the process
of sense-making and establishing mathematical knowledge, and Johnson-Laird (1999) as a
thought process that yields a conclusion from percepts and assertions.
11 | Theoretical background
The literature distinguishes several kinds of reasoning. Peirce (1878/1998) discerned three
types of reasoning according to their underlying process: (1) deduction of a result from a rule
and an occurrence of a case (e.g., "The angle sum of any [planar] triangle is 180o"+"T is a
triangle" → "The angle sum of T is 180o"); (2) induction of a rule from the occurrence of one
or more cases and a certain result, by means of probable deduction (i.e., the occurrences are
viewed as randomly selected, e.g., "T1, T2,… are arbitrary triangles" + "The angle sum of T1,
T2,… is 180o each" → "The angle sum of any triangle is 180o"); and (3) abduction – the
inference of a particular case from a general rule and a probable result of an application of the
rule to the case (i.e., similar to Sherlock Holmes's famous method of reasoning, e.g., "The
angle sum of any triangle is 180o"+"Hmm, the angle sum of T is 180o" → "T is a triangle").
Modern authors (Conner et al., 2014; English, 1998; Harel & Sowder, 1998, 2007; Knipping
& Reid, 2013; Yopp & Ely, 2016; Zazkis, Weber, & Mejía-Ramos, 2016) identify several
additional kinds of reasoning, among them are: generic example – specific examples are used
as representing a general class; empirical proof – specific examples are used but are not
representative; analogical reasoning – reliance on an analogy between two systems; and
external conviction – reliance on an external authority or on visual attributes of the argument.
Generic examples are regarded as a step that can help students generalize and achieve formal
abstraction (Harel & Tall, 1991)
Deductive reasoning is a kind of reasoning which pertains to the process of using rules and
syllogisms of formal logic to infer valid conclusions from known information. It is highly
regarded by many (Luria, 1976), especially in mathematics (M. Ayalon & Even, 2008;
Hanna, 1990; Johnson-Laird, 1999; Mariotti, 2006; Yackel & Hanna, 2003), whereas
empirical reasoning is typically predominant in other sciences.
Mathematical proof is a special type of deductive reasoning. Formal proof refers to a
sequence of propositions (i.e., axioms and results of rules of inference applied to previous
formulae in the sequence) terminating in the theorem that is proved. However, the
mathematician John Dawson (2006, 2015) considers these proofs to be "abstractions from
mathematical practice that fail to capture many important aspects of that practice" (2006, p.
270), and irrelevant to certain areas of mathematics that have not been formally based on
axioms. Placing rigor over logical formality, Dawson defines proof as "an informal argument
whose purpose is to convince those who endeavor to follow it that a certain mathematical
statement is true" (2006, p. 270). In recent years, other types of proof are gaining acceptance,
such as visual and non-verbal proof (e.g., Nelsen, 1993, 2000).
Section 2.1 – Justification and explanation in school mathematics | 12
In the course of the past few decades, research has often explored the purpose of proof in
mathematics education (e.g., Bell, 1976; de Villiers, 1990; Hanna, 2000). Contemporary
views of the forms of proof (Dreyfus, Nardi, & Leikin, 2012) and its functions in
mathematics and in mathematics education (Hanna, 2000; Hanna et al., 2010; Kidron &
Dreyfus, 2009, 2010; Mejia-Ramos & Weber, 2014; NCTM, 2000; Weber & Mejia-Ramos,
2011) distinguish among a multitude of aspects and purposes of proofs: (1) establishing
certainty, (2) gaining understanding, (3) communicating ideas, (4) meeting an intellectual
challenge, (5) discovering new results, (6) presenting new methods, (7) exploring the
implications of a statement, (8) showing connections between different parts of mathematics,
and (9) constructing a greater mathematical theory.
Justification in mathematics is focused on what makes a certain proposition true. It can vary
in formality, from intuitive and informal to rigorous and deductive (e.g., Blum & Kirsch,
1991; Harel & Sowder, 2007; Miyazaki, 2000; Sierpinska, 1994). Regardless of formality,
justifications can have an explanatory role (i.e., focusing on why a proposition is true) and
contribute to the understanding of a proposition. Hanna (1990) differentiates between proofs
that prove and proofs that explain – both show that a statement is true, yet the former
provides only substantiation while the latter additionally provides a rationale showing why it
is true. On the other hand, Balacheff (2010) does not make this distinction and argues that
every proof starts as an explanation, which later undergoes a process of validation by the
appropriate community.
In this study, I use the terms justification and justification and explanation interchangeably.
They denote elements of language, be it spoken, written, or gestured, that can explain and/or
justify a mathematical statement, regardless of their formality. Such elements may include
formal proofs, empirical experimentations, proofs without words, and elements that serve
didactical purposes only (e.g., invoking students' intuition, or affirming the statement).
In the following section, I discuss several conceptual frameworks proposed in the literature to
discuss and classify justification.
2.1.1.2. Conceptual frameworks
Several classification systems for kinds of justification and explanation were suggested by
mathematics education researchers (e.g., Balacheff, 1988; Bell, 1976; Blum & Kirsch, 1991;
Branford, 1908; Harel & Sowder, 2007; Miyazaki, 2000; Sierpinska, 1994; Stacey &
Vincent, 2009). These frameworks establish levels of justification as based on different
13 | Theoretical background
dimensions and criteria, such as levels of formality (Blum & Kirsch, 1991; Branford, 1908),
strength of the deduction (Bell, 1976), and the nature of the reasoning involved (Balacheff,
1988; Harel & Sowder, 1998, 2007; Stacey & Vincent, 2009). Despite different viewpoints,
many frameworks agree on three classes of justification.
One such class is a valid proof, based on logical inferences and transformations, with or
without relying directly on axioms. This class has been denoted by many names over the
years, among them are scientific explanation (Branford, 1908; Sierpinska, 1994), deductive /
analytical proof scheme (Harel & Sowder, 1998, 2007), deduction using a general case
(Stacey & Vincent, 2009), conceptual proof (Balacheff, 1988), strong deduction (Bell, 1976),
proof A (Miyazaki, 2000), and formal proof (Blum & Kirsch, 1991). Some authors
distinguish generic examples from this class (e.g., Balacheff, 1988; Stacey & Vincent, 2009).
A second class is an empirical verification of the result, based on a finite number of special
cases. This class is denoted in the literature in many ways, such as experimental argument
(Blum & Kirsch, 1991; Branford, 1908), empirical proof scheme (Harel & Sowder, 1998,
2007), experimental demonstration (Stacey & Vincent, 2009), weak deduction (Bell, 1976),
proof C (Miyazaki, 2000), and pragmatic proof (Balacheff, 1988).
A third class is based on intuitive and non-formal arguments. This class is denoted as
intuitional proof (Branford, 1908), pre-formal proof (Blum & Kirsch, 1991), and appeal to
authority and qualitative analogy (Stacey & Vincent, 2009). Harel and Sowder (1998, 2007)
refer to it as an external conviction proof scheme, which includes reliance on the authority of
a book or of a person (e.g., a teacher or a mathematician), or on certain visual and ritualistic
attributes of the argument (e.g., a two column argument might be perceived as a proof).
Sierpinska (1994) suggested a distinction of a different nature, based on the target audience to
be convinced: (1) didactic – a justification which aims to provide a sense of familiarity in a
school setting (e.g., an example or a model); and (2) scientific – a proof sufficient to satisfy
the mathematical community.
The distinction between mathematical proof and other types of justification, made in the
conceptual frameworks mentioned above, reflects certain inherent differences between the
mathematical community and in mathematics education community. The following section
focuses on the comparison of justification in these two communities.
Section 2.1 – Justification and explanation in school mathematics | 14
2.1.1.3. Justification in mathematics education and in mathematics
The literature identifies several differences in justification in mathematics education and in
mathematics, such as the nature of acceptable justification, its purposes, its process of
construction, and the topics in which justification is expected.
First, there is a difference in the very nature of justification acceptable in each community.
Traditionally, justification in mathematics is identified with a rigorous, logical, and deductive
proof (e.g., P. J. Davis & Hersh, 1981; Eves, 1972; Hanna, 2014; Sriraman & Umland, 2014;
Umland & Sriraman, 2014; Weber, 2008), whereas in mathematics education other types of
justification are acceptable. Moreover, these other types are valued and encouraged for
pedagogical purposes, such as catering to students' level of mathematical knowledge and
understanding (Ball & Bass, 2003; Reid, 2005; Sierpinska, 1994; Yackel & Hanna, 2003).
These differences might be related to a difference in maturation of cognitive abilities and
mental structures related to proof (Tall, 2014; Tall et al., 2012), different norms (Bass & Ball,
2014; A. Watson, 2008; Yackel & Cobb, 1996), and beliefs (Furinghetti & Morselli, 2011).
Second, justification serves somewhat different purposes and functions in each community.
As discussed above, proof serves a multitude of roles in mathematics, such as verification,
explanation, and discovery (e.g., de Villiers, 1990; Hanna et al., 2010). While some of these
functions exist in school mathematics, such as explanation and validation, most functions are
different (Cabassut, 2005; Zaslavsky, Nickerson, Stylianides, Kidron, & Winicki-Landman,
2012). For example, proving in order to discover new mathematical results is generally not
part of school mathematics (Herbst & Brach, 2006).
Furthermore, multiple justifications for the same mathematical statement serve different roles
in the two communities. For mathematicians, multiple proofs may serve practical, personal,
or aesthetic goals (Dawson, 2006). Such goals include remedying flaws in earlier arguments
or simplifying them, providing multiple perspectives, deepening understanding of concepts,
helping discover new techniques, connecting various mathematical concepts, demonstrating
the power of various methodologies, or presenting a particularly elegant and ingenious
strategy (Dawson, 2006; Rav, 1999; Siu, 2008). In mathematics education, multiple
justifications often serve pedagogical purposes, such as catering to students with different
levels of cognitive ability (Tall et al., 2012), demonstrating the power of dynamic geometry
software (Sigler, Segal, & Stupel, 2016), encouraging flexibility and creativity (Leikin, 2009,
15 | Theoretical background
2014), deepening understanding (Sierpinska, 1994), and developing an appreciation of the
value of justification, explanation, and proof in mathematics (Polya, 1945/1973).
Third, several studies focused on the processes of construction of justifications. These studies
suggest that while both learners (Bieda & Lepak, 2012; Kidron & Dreyfus, 2009) and
practicing mathematicians (Kidron & Dreyfus, 2010; Wilkerson-Jerde & Wilensky, 2011)
explore specific examples when making sense of a what they are required to justify, learners
tend to use examples unproductively (Bieda & Lepak, 2012). Moreover, many students rely
(incorrectly) on empirical evidence as justification for general assertions (Chazan, 1993;
Healy & Hoyles, 2000), even at the tertiary level (e.g., Selden & Selden, 2008).
Fourth, justification is expected for different topics in each community. Until recent years,
the teaching of deductive justification was limited to geometry, and algebra was viewed as a
domain suitable only for generalizing computational processes (Arcavi, Drijvers, & Stacey,
2017; Sfard, 1995). Near the end of the twentieth century, other goals for teaching
justification began emerging, such as an opportunity for students to experience the work of
doing mathematics (González & Herbst, 2006). Additionally, the introduction of modern
technologies allowed students to engage in a wider range of reasoning activities, such as
generating conjectures and investigating them, thus allowing students to better understand
mathematics and the need for a mathematical proof to justify claims (e.g., Dreyfus & Hadas,
1996; Tabach, Hershkowitz, & Dreyfus, 2013; Verzosa, Guzon, & De las peñas, 2014;
Yerushalmy & Chazan, 1987). Still, students see little value in justification (Healy & Hoyles,
2000), and there is a gap between the views of mathematicians and mathematics educators in
this respect (Weber, 2014).
2.1.1.4. Justification in the mathematics school curriculum
Contemporary school mathematics curricula worldwide attribute a central role to developing
students' ability to reason and prove at all grade levels and content domains (e.g., Australian
Education Council, 1991; Common Core State Standards Initiative, 2015; Department for
Education - England, 2014; Israel Ministry of Education, 2009; NCTM, 2000).
The Israeli mathematics school curriculum for grades 7-9 explicitly emphasizes justification,
explanation, and proof, as well as investigation, exploration, problem solving, and the
generation of mathematical conjectures (Israel Ministry of Education, 2009). These aspects
are emphasized in three parts of the curriculum document: (i) as its main highlights, (ii) as its
goals, and (iii) for each content domain.
Section 2.1 – Justification and explanation in school mathematics | 16
The Israeli curriculum highlights the "development of mathematical ways of thinking
throughout the learning process: teaching not only facts and procedures, but also ways of
discovering mathematical phenomena, searching for ways to explain them, and finding
connections among them." (2009, p. 1). More specifically, the geometry curriculum involves
"an earlier introduction of the teaching of geometry, starting at the 7th grade," instead of at the
8th grade, which was the policy prior to the current curriculum, "in order to: "(1) ensure a
smooth transition between the elementary school curriculum and the junior high school
curriculum, and (2) prepare the students for a 'soft entrance' to deductive geometry studies"
(2009, p. 2). Furthermore, the geometry curriculum aims at "establishing and expanding the
knowledge of geometric facts, which are familiar from elementary school, learning
applicative aspects of geometry, and learning reasoning and conventions of a type that
comprises proofs, before learning the organized deductive structure." (2009, p. 2).
The goals of the Israeli curriculum explicitly stress explanation and justification for both
algebra and geometry: "Understanding the essence of algebra as a mathematical branch
dealing with processes of generalization, generating conjectures and justifying them;
Developing argumentative discourse: ways to explain or prove algebraic properties and rules;
… Giving explanation and proof for geometric properties" (2009, p. 3). In addition, the
Israeli curriculum aims to "connect and integrate algebra and geometry; for examples: by
giving an algebraic proof for a problem in geometry and vice versa" (p. 3).
In algebra, the Israeli curriculum emphasizes "thinking processes: constructing concepts and
their definitions, exploration and discovering phenomena, generating conjectures,
generalization and justification." (p. 6). It suggests linking algebra and geometry in proofs
which rely on the general case: "the general proof [for the congruence of vertically opposite
angles] shows an interesting combination between algebra and geometry." (p. 10)
In geometry, proof is described as "a key concept in deductive geometry." (p. 10), and the
curriculum aims to introduce it in a gradual process over three years, "through experimenting
with reasoning and informal justification of claims, understanding proofs, and eventually
even constructing proofs." The curriculum further suggests offering different types of
justification to different students, according to the students' level: "In teaching proofs there
are several steps towards writing a full proof in formal language, and it is necessary to adjust
the requirements [on formalism] to students' abilities." (p. 10). Specifically, "Phrasing the
rationale of the proof non-formally, compared with phrasing it in a mathematically rigorous
form, defines different levels of difficulty."
17 | Theoretical background
Other curricula worldwide have similar emphases and goals. For example, in the United
States, the Common Core emphasizes mathematical practices such as "reason abstractly and
quantitatively" (Common Core State Standards Initiative, 2010, p. 47). Similarly, the British
curriculum emphasizes that "teachers should develop pupils' numeracy and mathematical
reasoning in all subjects" (Department of Education, 2010, p. 9), to ensure that all pupils
"reason mathematically by following a line of enquiry, conjecturing relationships and
generalizations, and developing an argument, justification or proof using mathematical
language" (p. 37).
2.1.2. Perceptions about justification and explanation in mathematics education
Research has demonstrated repeatedly that students face fundamental difficulties with
activities that involve justification skills, and especially with proving (Balacheff, 1991; Bell,
1976; Chazan, 1993; Dreyfus, 1999; Harel & Sowder, 1998; Herbst & Brach, 2006;
Schoenfeld, 1985; Senk, 1985; Weber, 2001), even high level students (Healy & Hoyles,
2000; Selden & Selden, 2008) and pre-service teachers (Crespo & Nicol, 2006).
In order to better understand the role of justification in mathematics education, it is important
to examine what is known about the perceptions and beliefs of students and of teachers –
about mathematics and about the nature of mathematics teaching and learning.
2.1.2.1. Student perceptions
A large body of evidence regarding students’ performance with justification reveals
difficulties in reading or constructing formal justification, in understanding its nature and
purpose, in differentiating deductive justification from other types, and in deriving additional
results (e.g., Balacheff, 1988; Chazan, 1993; Harel & Sowder, 1998).
Studies on students' beliefs and conceptions about proof suggest that students hold
counterproductive beliefs regarding the nature of justification in mathematics (Harel &
Sowder, 1998; Martin & Harel, 1989; Senk, 1985). For example, many students view
empirical evidence as sufficient justification for a general claim, yet not as a valid proof
(Balacheff, 1988; Healy & Hoyles, 2000). This ability to determine whether an argument
suffices as proof might be related to age, or at least to experience with teachers’ expectations
(Bieda, Holden, & Knuth, 2006). It may also be connected to another student belief,
according to which an argument must follow a two-column structure to be a valid
mathematical proof (e.g., Harel & Sowder, 1998).
Section 2.1 – Justification and explanation in school mathematics | 18
A common challenge for students in constructing justifications is deciding which theorems
and facts to apply at each step. Some students attempt symbol manipulation, which may
involve mathematically nonsensical operations (Harel & Sowder, 1998). Weber (2001, 2004)
suggested that students might not be familiar with powerful proof techniques and may not
know how to determine whether and when symbol manipulation might be applicable.
As a result, students often consider proof to be a meaningless ritual (Ball, Hoyles, Jahnke, &
Movshovitz-Hadar, 2002). Furthermore, this notion is strengthened by an underlying belief
regarding the certainty of mathematical knowledge and the absolute truth of mathematically
proven claims. These beliefs have been shaken several times in the history of mathematics
yet are still common: The introduction of non-Euclidean geometries shook the belief in a
single system of axioms, Russell's Paradox shook the belief in the infallibility of derivation
from axioms, and certain proofs of mathematical theorems (e.g., Andrew Weyl's proof of
Fermat's last theorem) were found to be inaccurate or incorrect (Rott, Leuders, & Stahl,
2015). Additionally, students do not see a reason for providing more than one justification for
a mathematical claim, and often believe that counterexamples for a general claim are merely
exceptions, and may exist alongside a general proof (Balacheff, 1988; Bell, 1976).
2.1.2.2. Teacher perceptions
Teachers play several roles in shaping students' opportunities to learn to explain and justify:
establishing a discourse in which students can justify their claims and evaluate claims made
by others (e.g., Sherin, 2002; Wood, 1999), introducing students to acceptable justification
strategies (Mariotti, 2006; Stylianides, 2008b), offering examples allowing pattern detection
(Bieda & Lepak, 2012; Zodik & Zaslavsky, 2008), and adapting written curriculum materials
(Ziebarth et al., 2009). Additionally, research suggests that teachers' beliefs about the role of
argumentation (M. Ayalon, 2011), their intentions (Nie et al., 2013) and gestures (Weinberg,
Fukawa-Connelly, & Wiesner, 2015) shape the nature and opportunities for justification.
Research suggests that while teachers recognize formal proofs, many hold limited views of
what constitutes mathematical proof and regard other types of justification (e.g., verbal,
visual, or using a generic example) as insufficient (Dreyfus, 2000; Knuth, 2002). Moreover,
studies suggest that teachers can name a variety of proof’s functions in mathematics, yet not
many recognized proof as a tool for learning mathematics (Knuth, 2002). This might suggest
that teachers focus on justification as a process of justifying, rather than the product of a
process (Furinghetti & Morselli, 2011). Even when viewed as a process, proofs can convey
mathematical methods, strategies, and techniques to students (Rav, 1999).
19 | Theoretical background
Studies suggest that in-service secondary school teachers focus less on the validity of a
justification and more on checking whether it contained redundant (albeit correct) statements
(Tsamir, Tirosh, Dreyfus, Barkai, & Tabach, 2009), and verifying the correctness of the
algebraic manipulations (Knuth, 2002). Even more so, teachers traditionally view
justification as representing high-order thinking, and therefore not suitable for students with
low achievements (Zohar, Degani, & Vaaknin, 2001). This was found to be related to a view
of learning as a hierarchical process which progresses from simple skills to more complex
ones. Zohar and Dori (2003) suggested that students with low achievements actually gain
much from learning higher order thinking skills. Moreover, a meta-analysis by Baker,
Gersten, and Lee (2002) suggests that students with low achievements gain most when
concepts, skills, and procedures are provided explicitly.
2.2. The role of textbooks in mathematics education
An increasing number of textbook studies have been conducted since the turn of the century,
most of which are textbook analysis and comparison (Fan, Zhu, & Miao, 2013). These studies
examined various aspects, such as national trends and educational approaches (e.g., Jones et
al., 2009; Xu, 2013), the content presented in textbooks (e.g., Sun & Kulm, 2010), the level
of the cognitive demand required by tasks (e.g., da Ponte, 2007; D. L. Jones & Tarr, 2007;
Niv, 2011), the nature of proof (e.g., Miyakawa, 2012, 2017), and opportunities offered in
textbooks for students to learn to justify (e.g., Dolev, 2011; Dolev & Even, 2013). Several
research studies have focused on variations in different grade levels, topics, and textbook
series (e.g., D. L. Jones & Tarr, 2007; Stylianides, 2009).
Accumulating research suggests that textbooks serve an important role in shaping students’
opportunities to learn mathematics (J. A. Newton, 2012; Stein, Remillard, & Smith, 2007).
Additional factors shape these opportunities, such as teacher and student characteristics,
beliefs, and expectations, as well as classroom norms and learning environments (e.g.,
Chazan, 2000; Tarr et al., 2008), yet not much is known about the interplay of these factors.
Fan et al. (2013) identify four categories of mathematics textbook studies based on their
focus: (i) the role of textbooks in teaching and learning mathematics, (ii) the ways in which
textbooks shape teaching and learning, (iii) analysis of features of mathematics textbooks and
(in some cases) comparison of textbook series, and (iv) miscellaneous. This section focuses
on two issues: (1) the importance and contribution of textbooks in mathematics education,
and (2) justification and explanation in mathematics textbooks.
Section 2.2 – The role of textbooks in mathematics education | 20
2.2.1. The importance of textbooks in mathematics education
Several models were suggested to identify and map levels of curriculum within an education
system (e.g., Goodlad, Tye, & Klein, 1979; Schmidt et al., 1996; Valverde, Bianchi, Wolfe,
Schmidt, & Houang, 2002). For example, Schmidt et al.'s (1996) model comprises three
levels – intended, implemented, and attained curricula. Studies focusing on the role of
textbooks, such as the Third Trends in International Mathematics and Science Study, suggest
that textbook constitute a fourth level (Valverde et al., 2002). This level mediates between the
intentions of curriculum documents designers and the implementation and enactment of
policy by teachers. Specifically, textbooks can translate abstract guidelines into activities and
content accessible to teachers and students (Howson, 2013).
Studies focusing on the ways in which textbooks shape teaching and learning indicate that the
influence of textbooks is considerable, for teachers and students alike (Eisenmann & Even,
2009, 2011; Haggarty & Pepin, 2002; Mesa & Griffiths, 2012; Remillard, 2009; Rezat, 2012;
Shield & Dole, 2013; Trgalová & Jahn, 2013; Usiskin, 2013). However, even though
mathematics textbooks are commonly addressed at students (Remillard, 2012), studies on
students' use of textbook are rare.
The literature suggests that textbooks are a major learning resource for students when solving
tasks in class and when completing homework problems (Mesa & Griffiths, 2012; Rezat,
2012). Analysis of the textbook sections used by students reveals that introductory texts were
infrequently read by students when solving homework assignments (Mesa & Griffiths, 2012),
yet they have the potential to change a teacher's lesson plans (Rezat, 2012).
Teachers use textbooks as one of the main sources for content and activities to include in
their lesson plans (Eisenmann & Even, 2009, 2011; Haggarty & Pepin, 2002), as well as for
teaching strategies (Fan, 2013; Fan et al., 2013; Son & Senk, 2010), sometimes with other
curriculum materials (Remillard, 2009). Moreover, textbooks influence how teachers portray
mathematical topics and implement their understanding of students’ learning trajectories in a
classroom (Valverde et al., 2002).
Together with the textbook, additional factors shape mathematics teaching and learning. For
example, national culture and school setting were revealed to influence the mathematics
available to students (e.g., number and type of examples) as well as student access to
textbooks (Haggarty & Pepin, 2002). Additionally, Rezat (2012) demonstrated how the
interaction between teacher and students actively shapes the enacted curriculum.
21 | Theoretical background
Studies have shown empirically that when using the same textbook, different teachers use it
in different manners and with different emphases (Eisenmann & Even, 2009, 2011; Even &
Kvatinsky, 2010; Thompson & Senk, 2014; Tirosh, Even, & Robinson, 1998). For example,
students are given different opportunities to learn to justify (Even & Kvatinsky, 2010;
Haggarty & Pepin, 2002; Knuth, 2002; Mesa & Griffiths, 2012) and thus even if
opportunities for justification are provided in a textbook, they might not become available to
students (Mesa & Griffiths, 2012; Thompson & Senk, 2014).
The research program Same Teacher – Different Classrooms, which focuses on teachers who
teach mathematics in more than one classroom while using the same textbook or syllabus,
was developed to study the interplay of factors shaping students' opportunities to learn
mathematics (Even, 2008, 2014). Studies that belong to this research program have revealed
detailed information about the role of the classroom and teacher characteristics in shaping
these opportunities (e.g., Ayalon & Even, 2015; Eisenmann & Even, 2009, 2011, Even &
Kvatinsky, 2009, 2010). These studies show differences in the mathematics taught in the
classrooms between classes of different teachers, between classes of the same teacher who
use the same textbook, and between mathematical topics.
In sharp contrast to the relative abundance of textbook studies, studies that focus on
justification were very rare in the previous century (Hanna & de Bruyn, 1999), and their
number has been slowly growing in the past decade.
2.2.2. Justification and explanation in mathematics textbooks
Textbook studies focusing on justification are not common in the mathematics education
literature. However, in recent years a growing number of studies have been conducted around
the world. Several studies centered on the notion of proof only, yet some examined
justification without restricting themselves to proof-related aspects. Generally, these studies
report a small number of opportunities for students to learn to explain and justify, especially
outside geometry. This number of opportunities varies among textbooks, but it is ultimately
low. However, research on textbook justification relies on several very different research
frameworks – conceptual and analytic. Therefore, comparison across studies is problematic.
This section briefly reviews these studies, their methodologies, and their main findings.
2.2.2.1. Frameworks for textbook analysis of justification
Much like a scaffold encloses a building and allows access to otherwise unreachable areas, a
research framework provides a basic structure of relevant features of a phenomenon and
Section 2.2 – The role of textbooks in mathematics education | 22
relationships among them (Lester, 2005). Thus, it allows data interpretation, crystallization of
ideas, and conceptualization and design of research studies. I have identified in the literature
four research frameworks for textbook analysis of justification.
Stylianides (2008a, 2009) proposed the Reasoning-and-Proving analytic framework, which
emphasizes the integrated nature of reasoning and proof. The framework comprises two main
components. One involves making a generalization, by identifying a pattern and making a
conjecture. Another involves providing support to claims, either by providing a proof (i.e.,
creating a valid argument based on axioms, generic examples, and other truths taken as
shared by the community) or providing a non-proof argument (i.e., justifying a statement by
using either empirical reasoning or giving the general rationale).
Stylianides’s framework has directly influenced a growing number of textbook studies at all
grade levels, from elementary school level (Bieda et al., 2014; McCrory & Stylianides, 2014),
through middle school (Fujita & Jones, 2014) and to high school level (J. D. Davis et al.,
2014; Otten, Males, & Gilbertson, 2014). The following framework was developed in parallel
to Stylianides's, and "has many similarities to it" (Thompson et al., 2012, p. 258).
Thompson, Senk, and Johnson (2012) developed an analytic framework in order to identify
opportunities to learn reasoning and proof in high school mathematics textbooks. The
framework comprises two main components. One involves student activities such as making
and investigating conjectures, developing and evaluating arguments, and providing
counterexamples. The other discerns two types of textbook justification offered in
explanatory texts: a valid general proof and a generic example. If no justification is given, it
distinguishes between two cases: either it is explicitly left for the student to complete, or is
indeed missing. The framework was adapted and refined by several researchers (Bergwall &
Hemmi, 2017; Otten, Gilbertson, Males, & Clark, 2014; Otten, Males, et al., 2014).
Stacey and Vincent (2009) proposed a conceptual framework following a textbook analysis
study. Their conceptual framework refines Harel and Sowder's (2007) categories and
comprises seven modes of reasoning in textbook justifications. Two external conviction
types: (1) Appeal to authority – reliance on the authority of a person or of the textbook itself,
when no justification is given for a statement; and (2) Qualitative analogy – a surface
similarity between a claim and a non-mathematical situation (e.g., 'fruit salad algebra', in
which pronumerals are used to represent objects rather than numbers). Two empirical types:
(3) Concordance of a rule with a model - a rule and a model yield the same results for the
23 | Theoretical background
selected examples; and (4) Experimental demonstration – an observed regularity of results
obtained by using special cases. And three deductive types: (5) Deduction using a model – a
model which serves to illustrate a general claim (i.e., as opposed to specific cases); (6)
Deduction using a specific case – a generic example, given as a chain of logical deduction
conducted in terms of a special case; and (7) Deduction using a general case – either a chain
of reasoning backed by previously established knowledge, or a generic example followed by
a generalization of the process.
Ronda and Adler (2017) suggested an analytic framework aimed at the mathematics made
possible in a textbook lesson. Their framework extends the Mathematical Discourse in
Instruction (MDI) analytic tool, originally developed for classroom lesson analysis (Adler &
Ronda, 2015). One of its four components focuses on justification. It discerns three kinds of
Legitimations: (1) no justification is offered (appeal to authority), (2) specific examples are
given and used to explain a statement (substantiation by example), and (3) using
counterexamples and previously established definitions, principles, and procedures
(substantiation by general case). This framework draws from Stacey and Vincent's (2009)
framework and simplifies it "for a relatively simple categorization within each of our
elements of MDI" (Ronda & Adler, 2017, p. 9).
2.2.2.2. Methodologies for textbook analysis of justification
The limited research on justification in mathematics textbooks may be related to relatively
underdeveloped methodological techniques, compared with techniques for researching
classroom practice (Stylianides, 2014). Three methodological issues await researchers
coming to design a textbook analysis study: (1) Locating justifications, (2) Types of data
sources to use, and (3) Choosing perspective/s for analysis.
The first issue is related to the location of justifications. Justification is relevant across all age
groups, and researchers may focus on any group: elementary school (Bieda et al., 2014; D. P.
Newton & Newton, 2007), middle school (Dolev & Even, 2013; Stylianides, 2009), high
school (Nordström & Löfwall, 2005; Thompson et al., 2012), and tertiary school (J. D. Davis,
2009; McCrory & Stylianides, 2014).
In addition, justification is relevant across mathematical topics, which necessitates a choice of
which textbooks to analyze. Many focused on Geometry (Fujita & Jones, 2014; Miyakawa,
2012, 2017; Otten, Gilbertson, et al., 2014; Otten, Males, et al., 2014), others on Algebra (J.
D. Davis et al., 2014; Thompson et al., 2012), and yet others on a combination of several
Section 2.2 – The role of textbooks in mathematics education | 24
topics, including algebra, geometry, functions, and/or trigonometry (Dolev & Even, 2013;
Hanna & de Bruyn, 1999; Stacey & Vincent, 2009).
Moreover, even after selecting mathematical topics for analysis, the question of which
textbook section to analyze arises. Generally, mathematics textbook chapters can be broken
into two distinct types of sections: (1) explanatory texts, intended for the entire class
population (e.g., to introduce, exemplify, and justify new concepts and results); and (2) task
pools, comprising activities intended for student work – individually or in small groups.
Some studies analyzing the explanatory texts in textbooks (e.g., Cabassut, 2005; Stacey &
Vincent, 2009); other studies focused only on analyzing the task pools (e.g., Dolev & Even,
2013; Stylianides, 2009); and yet other studies focused on both sections (e.g., Bergwall &
Hemmi, 2017; Hanna & de Bruyn, 1999; Otten, Males, et al., 2014; Thompson et al., 2012).
The second methodological issue relates to the types of data sources used for analysis. For
example, many textbook studies referred to the corresponding teacher’s guide (e.g., Bieda et
al., 2014; J. D. Davis et al., 2014; Dolev & Even, 2013; Fujita & Jones, 2014; Otten,
Gilbertson, et al., 2014). Consulting the teacher’s guide for data triangulation can shed light
on the goals for textbook items with information provided by the textbook’s authors. A small
number of studies combined textbook analysis with classroom observations and/or interviews
(e.g., Haggarty & Pepin, 2002; Sears & Chávez, 2014).
The third methodological issue relates to choosing perspective/s for phrasing a research
question. Many studies choose a student perspective and focus on opportunities offered for
students to learn to explain and justify (Dolev & Even, 2013; Stacey & Vincent, 2009;
Stylianides, 2009). Some chose a mathematical perspective, focusing on the mathematical
potential of textbook items (e.g., Stylianides, 2009). Other perspectives include a teacher
perspective and a textbook author perspective (Stylianides, 2014).
2.2.2.3. Findings from textbook analysis studies of justification
Two lines of research are common in studies which focus on the opportunities offered for
students in mathematics textbooks to learn to explain and justify: (1) studies focusing on
opportunities for students to engage in tasks that involve justification (e.g., Dolev & Even,
2013; Sidenvall, Lithner, & Jäder, 2015; Stylianides, 2009); and (2) studies focusing on
opportunities for students to read justifications in introductory sections in textbooks (e.g.,
Bergwall & Hemmi, 2017; Dolev, 2011; Hanna & de Bruyn, 1999; Stacey & Vincent, 2009).
25 | Theoretical background
Studies of the opportunities for students to engage in explaining and justifying in textbook
tasks have often revealed a very low ratio of such tasks, both in Israel (Dolev & Even, 2013)
and in other countries (J. D. Davis, 2012; Hanna & de Bruyn, 1999; Nordström & Löfwall,
2005; Stylianides, 2009; Thompson et al., 2012). For example, Stylianides (2009) analyzed
textbooks for grades 6-8 and found a low ratio of tasks calling for empirical arguments and
generic examples, together with a relatively high ratio of tasks calling for rationales – a type
of valid yet incomplete argument that does not qualify as proof.
The low ratio of justification-related tasks is evident at all age groups – from elementary
school (Bieda et al., 2014), through lower-secondary (Stylianides, 2009) and higher-
secondary schools (J. D. Davis, 2012; Hanna & de Bruyn, 1999; Nordström & Löfwall, 2005;
Thompson et al., 2012), and up to prospective teachers (McCrory & Stylianides, 2014).
Moreover, this low ratio is discernable for most mathematical topics, and especially outside
geometry (Bergwall & Hemmi, 2017; Dolev & Even, 2013; Hanna & de Bruyn, 1999). For
example, Dolev and Even (2013) analyzed six Israeli 7th grade textbooks (experimental
version) and found a low ratio of justification tasks in algebra and a moderately high ratio in
geometry. Furthermore, Davis (2012) examined the use of technological tools (e.g., graphing
calculators and Computer Algebra System) in textbook tasks and found that CAS was used
mainly for pattern identification but was not used for tasks that involve constructing an
argument. These findings are consistent with a traditional view of geometry as a domain
suitable for teaching students how to prove.
Studies of the opportunities for students to read justifications in student textbooks show that
mathematical claims are justified in various ways – deductive and empirical (Cabassut, 2005;
Dolev, 2011; Otten, Gilbertson, et al., 2014; Stacey & Vincent, 2009; Thompson et al., 2012).
However, the differences between the mathematical validity of these justifications are not
always made visible to students (Nordström & Löfwall, 2005). Moreover, some claims are
left unjustified or rely on non-justification strategies, such as the textbook authors’ authority
(Cabassut, 2005; Otten, Gilbertson, et al., 2014; Ronda & Adler, 2017; Stacey & Vincent,
2009). For example, Stacey and Vincent (2009) analyzed the justifications offered for seven
mathematical statements in nine 8th grade Australian textbooks. Their results indicate that
17% of the justifications were coded as external.
Studies that focused on proof-related reasoning revealed that deductive justifications, and in
particular valid proofs, are rare, especially outside geometry. This pattern is evident in
Section 2.2 – The role of textbooks in mathematics education | 26
textbooks in many countries – such as Canada (Hanna & de Bruyn, 1999), the United States
(J. D. Davis et al., 2014; McCrory & Stylianides, 2014; Otten, Gilbertson, et al., 2014;
Thompson et al., 2012), Ireland (J. D. Davis, 2013), and Sweden (Bergwall & Hemmi, 2017)
– but not every country (e.g., Bergwall & Hemmi, 2017; Fujita & Jones, 2014).
Using a conceptual framework which refined Harel and Sowder's (2007) categories of proof
schemes used by students, Stacey and Vincent (2009) found that the textbooks employed
several types of justification when justifying mathematical statements. In some cases,
textbooks justified a statement using more than one type of justification or one type more
than once. Dolev (2011) used this framework to analyze the justifications offered for three
mathematical statements in Israeli 7th grade textbooks and obtained similar results.
This use of several justifications for one mathematical claim may reflect a complex
argumentation structure, in which several reasons supporting a standpoint are offered either
as alternative unrelated defenses or as a chain of mutually reinforcing reasons (Van Eemeren
& Grootendorst, 2004). Such structure is likely to have an additive effect (Sierpinska, 1994),
and could serve didactical and pedagogical purposes. For example, a properly constructed
sequence of arguments can prevent reasoning gaps by attending to both conceptual and
logical aspects (Triantafillou, Spiliotopoulou, & Potari, 2016), cater to students with different
levels of cognitive ability (Tall et al., 2012), reinforce and extend understanding even if the
justification is not considered sufficient in the mathematical community (Sierpinska, 1994),
and develop an appreciation of the value of justification, explanation, and proof in
mathematics (Polya, 1945/1973).
Furthermore, the inclusion of more than one justification for one statement indicates that in
addition to characterizing each textbook justification separately, it is important to attend also
to the Paths of Justification – the ways in which justifications of one statement are arranged,
structured, and sequenced. This aspect has received little attention in the literature. That is the
focus of this study. It examines the paths of justification offered in Israeli 7th grade textbooks
for key mathematical statements, and the contribution of the textbook, together with
additional factors, to shaping the paths of justification in the classroom.
27 | Research questions
3. Research questions
This study focuses on explanations and justifications in 7th grade mathematics textbooks, and
the role of the textbook in shaping the opportunities offered in 7th grade Israeli classrooms to
learn how to explain and justify.
As the literature review shows, textbook analysis is an emerging subject of research.
Research suggests that textbooks offer a variety of explanations and justifications for
mathematical statements. Moreover, studies reveal that some textbooks offer more than one
justification per mathematical statement. This use of several justifications for one statement is
likely to have an additive effect, such as serving a didactic goal of reinforcing and extending
students’ understanding. Therefore, it is important to attend not only to each instance of
justification as an independent unit, but also to the paths of justification, i.e., to the ways
justifications of one statement are arranged and structured – an aspect that receives little
attention in the literature.
Moreover, the literature review suggests that several factors (e.g., teachers, students, and
mathematical topics) are involved in shaping the opportunities offered for students to learn
how to explain and justify mathematical statements in mathematics classrooms (e.g., M.
Ayalon & Even, 2013; Even & Kvatinsky, 2010).
The study builds on these results, in order to characterize the opportunities offered in 7th
grade Israeli textbooks for students to learn how to explain and justify, and the ways in which
the textbook, in conjunction with the teacher and the students, shape these opportunities.
Two research questions were derived from these goals. The first research question focuses on
mathematics textbooks, and the second focuses on the contribution of the textbook to learning
to justify in class, alongside other factors – the teacher and the students. Each question
comprises two parts:
1. What opportunities to learn how to explain and justify mathematical statements are
offered to students in Israeli 7th grade mathematics textbooks?
a) What characterizes the instances of justification for mathematical statements in 7th
grade mathematics textbooks?
b) What characterizes the paths of justification for mathematical statements in 7th
grade mathematics textbooks?
Research questions | 28
2. How does the textbook, together with the teacher and the students, shape students'
opportunities to learn how to explain and justify mathematical statements in 7th grade
mathematics classrooms?
a) How does the textbook, together with the teacher and the students, shape the
instances of justification for mathematical statements in 7th grade mathematics
classrooms?
b) How does the textbook, together with the teacher and the students, shape the paths
of justification for mathematical statements in 7th grade mathematics classrooms?
29 | Methodology
4. Methodology
4.1. Part I: Justifications and explanations in Israeli 7th grade textbooks
In this section I present the methodology related to my first research question. The question
focuses on the opportunities offered in 7th grade Israeli mathematics textbooks for students to
learn how to explain and justify mathematical statements. First, I describe the sample
selection of textbooks and mathematical statements. Then I describe the data sources. Last, I
describe the methods of analysis.
4.1.1. Sample selection
Analysis included all eight approved Israeli 7th grade mathematics textbooks for Hebrew
speakers (at time of analysis). Table 1 summarizes general characteristics of the textbooks.
Each textbook is split into three volumes. The first volume is intended for all students, and
the other two volumes are either of standard/expanded scope, intended for the general student
population (six textbooks, labelled A-F in this study), or of limited scope, intended for
students with low achievements (two textbooks, labelled G-H). Two pairs of textbooks have a
common first volume – Textbooks B and G, and Textbooks C and H.
Three textbooks are published by commercial publishers: Textbook A (Luzon, Amoyal,
Cooperman, Bamberger, & Ginsburg, 2012), Textbook E (Yekuel & Bloomenkrantz, 2012),
and Textbook F (Shalev & Ozeri, 2012). One textbook is published by a non-profit
organization – Textbook D (Hershkovitz & Gilad, 2012). Four textbooks are published by
academic institutions: Textbook B (Zaslavsky et al., 2012), Textbook C (Ozrusso-Hagiag et
al., 2012), Textbook G (T. Ayalon, 2012), and Textbook H (Bouhadana et al., 2014).
Table 1. General characteristics of the analysed textbooks
Label Textbook Publishing Press Pages Textbook scope
(A) 10 BaRibua Commercial 665 Standard/Expanded
(B) Efshar Gam Aheret Academia 708 Standard/Expanded
(C) Mathematica Meshulevet: Blue Academia 639 Standard/Expanded
(D) Mathematica LeHatab Non-profit organization 704 Standard/Expanded
(E) Mathematica LeKita 7 Commercial 777 Standard/Expanded
(F) Zameret – Mathematica LeKita 7 Commercial 693 Standard/Expanded
(G) Kfiza LaGova Academia 654 Limited
(H) Mathematica Meshulevet: Green Academia 672 Limited
Section 4.1 – Part I: Justifications and explanations in Israeli 7th grade textbooks | 30
Ten key statements were selected for analysis from the Israeli 7th grade school mathematics
curriculum, five in algebra and five in geometry. Each selected statement is considered to be
central in the Israeli curriculum, and has received attention in the mathematics education
literature (see Chapter 6 – Justification strategies ). Statements were selected both in algebra
and in geometry in light of the historic bias in school mathematics, in which proof is reserved
for geometry statements. This was done in order to examine whether different justification is
offered for statements in different topics. The formulation of each statement was similar
across the analyzed textbooks. The 10 statements, presented by order of appearance in the
Israeli curriculum, are:
Algebra:
1. Two algebraic expressions are equivalent if one expression can be transformed into the
other by performing a sequence of valid operations for a common domain of numbers.
2. Division by zero is undefined.
3. The distributive property: a*(b + c) = ab + ac for any three numbers a, b, c.
4. Performing valid operations on both sides of an equation yields an equivalent equation.
5. The product of two negative numbers is a positive number.
Geometry:
6. The area formula for a trapezium with bases a, b and altitude h is (a + b)*h/2.
7. The area formula for a disk with radius r is πr2.
8. Vertically opposite angles are congruent.
9. The corresponding angles between parallel lines are equal.
10. The angle sum of a triangle is 180o.
The term mathematical statement is used rather than claim because two statements (i.e.,
division by zero and product of negatives) are historically regarded as mathematical
conventions, defined in order to ensure that certain principles (e.g., the distributive property)
remain consistent upon extending the concept of number beyond the set of natural numbers.
4.1.2. Data sources
For each statement, the data sources included the textbook chapters introducing it – a total of
889 textbook pages (3-58 pages per statement per textbook). I analysed each chapter
attending both to the introductory sections (e.g., introductory activities, narrative blocks,
definitions, and worked examples) and the related collections of tasks. I believe that analysis
of both sections is necessary to allow a complete and coherent picture of the opportunities to
learn how to explain and justify. Task pools may involve the students actively in providing
explanation and justification, and introductory sections involve multiple opportunities, such
as reading the textbook authors’ justifications and engaging in teacher-mediated justification.
31 | Methodology
Each chapter was analysed exhaustively, in order to identify every instance of justification
and fully characterize the path of justification offered in the textbook for that mathematical
statement. In addition, I analysed the relevant sections in each textbook's teacher's guide in
order to better understand and interpret the justifications offered in the textbooks.
4.1.3. Data analysis
Approximately 80% of the data were coded by 1-4 additional researchers, all familiar with
the conceptual framework used in this study (Krippendorf’s alpha was 0.79). The coding was
discussed among the coders in one of two ways: a) each member coded a path of justification
separately (46% of the paths), or b) I presented my coding of a path of justification to my
colleagues (33% of the paths). For each path, one code was consensually decided.
Analysis comprised four stages:
1. Identifying instances of justification for each statement, in each textbook.
(i) Segmenting each chapter into blocks (e.g., narrative blocks and introductory activities,
following Valverde, Bianchi, Wolfe, Schmidt, & Houang, 2002), and parsing each block
into separate elements (e.g., individual activities and text boxes).
(ii) Analysing the teaching aim of each element, with help from the teacher's guide.
(iii) Compiling a list of elements that explain and/or justify the mathematical statement –
including elements that may serve didactical purposes only (e.g., invoking students'
intuition, or affirming the statement) and elements that may serve as a precursor for
conjecture (e.g., an activity that aims at an identification of a pattern). If none were
offered in the textbook for a certain statement, it was coded as ‘no justification’.
Figure 1 illustrates two instances of justification for area of a trapezium, which were offered
in the introductory sections in Textbook B.
(a) (b)
Figure 1. Instances of justification – area of a trapezium (Textbook B, v.2, pp. 195-196)
Section 4.1 – Part I: Justifications and explanations in Israeli 7th grade textbooks | 32
2. Coding each instance of justification for two attributes: (1) the justification strategy, and
(2) the justification types (following the conceptual framework by Stacey & Vincent,
2009). In the following I describe each attribute.
The first attribute, the justification strategy, focuses on a content-specific characteristic
of each item. This characteristic deals with the warrants offered in justification of each
mathematical statement (following the argument model in Toulmin, 1958/2003). For
each item, I deconstructed it, identified its underlying strategy, and searched the
mathematics education literature for a mention of a similar warrant.
The second attribute, the type of justification, focuses on a meta-level characteristic of
each item. In my analysis of the types of justification I relied on Stacey and Vincent's
(2009) conceptual framework. I chose it due to its robustness and its proven usefulness in
analysing Israeli textbook justifications (e.g., Dolev, 2011). Table 2 lists the types of
justification, grouped into three categories: Deductive, Empirical, and External
justification (following Harel & Sowder, 2007). In addition, it presents the definitions I
used in this study. A more detailed presentation is given in Section 5.1 – The types of
justification offered.
I relied on the original definitions, with one exception. Stacey and Vincent defined two
variants of appeal to authority – either a reliance on an external figure of authority (e.g.,
mathematicians, a teacher, or a calculator) or no justification was given (i.e., appealing to
the authority of the textbook). I defined appeal to authority strictly as a reliance on an
Table 2. Types of justification, by categories (adapted from: Stacey & Vincent, 2009).
Type of justification Definition in this study
External
Appeal to authority Reliance on external sources of authority.
Qualitative analogy A surface similarity to non-mathematical situations.
Empirical
Experimental demonstration A pattern formed after checking specific examples.
Concordance of a rule with a model Matching specific results of a rule and a model.
Deductive
Deduction using a model A model illustrating a mathematical structure.
Deduction using a specific case An inference process relating to a generic example.
Deduction using a general case An inference process relating to the general case.
33 | Methodology
external figure of authority, because I believe that the absence of justification does not
necessarily imply a reliance on the textbook's authority. For example, it might imply an
assumption that students are already familiar with the justification from previous years.
The item in Figure 1(a) was coded as a deduction using a specific case, and the item in Figure
1(b) was coded as a deduction using a general case. Both items were coded as relying on the
same justification strategy – Dissection (i.e., representing the area of a given trapezium as a
sum of areas of shapes, each with an area formula known to the students).
3. Visually representing the paths of justification for each statement, in each textbook (80
paths in total). Figure 2 presents the paths for area of a trapezium in Textbooks B and F.
Each step represents a single instance of justification by order of appearance in the
textbook, and both the justification strategy and type are presented.
For example, the path in Textbook B comprised five items. The justification strategy in
the first three items was dissection, relying on three types of justification: experimental
demonstration, deduction using a specific case, and then deduction using a general case.
The last two items relied on deduction using a general case, by using two justification
strategies: Dissection and Construction (i.e., arranging several congruent trapeziums
such that they form a shape with an area formula known to the students).
Textbook Paths of justification
B
→
→
→
→
F
→
→
→
→
e=experimental demonstration; s/g=deduction using a specific/general case.
Figure 2. Paths of justification for the area of a trapezium (in Textbooks B and F)
4. Performing comparative analyses, by textbook and by mathematical statement, of the paths
of justification. Analysis focused on two aspects: (i) the characteristics of each instance
of justification (i.e., justification strategies and types), and (ii) the order of instances in
the textbook. Special attention was given to comparison between topics (i.e., geometry
and algebra, in light of the historic bias towards justification in geometry) and
comparison between textbook scopes (i.e., limited and standard / expanded, in light of
the accumulated body of research regarding the nature of the opportunities offered to
students with low achievements).
Dissection
e
Dissection
s
Dissection
g
Construction
g
Dissection
g
Dissection
e
Dissection
e
Dissection
e
Dissection
g
Construction
g
Section 4.2 – Part II: Textbooks, teachers, and students | 34
4.2. Part II: The contribution of the textbook, teacher, and students to
shaping classroom justifications and explanations
In this section I present the methodology related to my second research question. The
question focuses on the ways in which textbooks, in conjunction with the teacher and the
students, shape students' opportunities to learn how to explain and justify mathematical
statements. First, I describe the research design and participants. Then I describe the data
sources. Last, I describe the methods of analysis.
4.2.1. Research design and participants
Part II of the study utilized the "Same teacher – different classrooms" research design (Even,
2008, 2014): two case studies, each focused on a mathematics teacher who uses the same
textbook in two 7th grade classes (see Figure 3). Several studies using this design were
conducted by Ruhama Even's research group (M. Ayalon & Even, 2015, 2016, Eisenmann &
Even, 2009, 2011, Even & Kvatinsky, 2009, 2010). These studies consistently show different
opportunities to learn mathematics in different classrooms of the same teacher, even in cases
in which the same curriculum materials were used. This design was chosen for the current
study because it was shown to provide valuable data about the interplay between the teacher,
the students, and the curriculum materials used in the classroom. Specifically, it has the
potential to help better understand the contribution of the textbook in each classroom.
Figure 3. The research design for part II of this study
I started recruiting teachers in July 2015. My criteria were: 7th grade mathematics teachers
who use the same textbook in more than one classroom. By December 2015 I recruited two
teachers, both using Textbook C. In the following I describe each teacher and her classes.
35 | Methodology
4.2.1.1. Lena and her classes
Lena (pseudonym) received a B.Ed. from a teachers' college, and majored in mathematics. At
the beginning of the year of data collection she had five years of experience teaching
mathematics, all at the junior-high school level.
The school was a secular elementary school (grades 1-8), whose students came mostly from
four neighboring communal or cooperative settlements. The year of data collection was
Lena's first year teaching at this school. The school was categorized by the Israeli Ministry of
Education to be in the upper 30th percentile of the Socio-Economic Status index (SES). There
were two 7th grade classes in the school.
Lena taught both 7th grade classes: Class L1 with 29 students and Class L2 with 24.
Observations suggest that the student ability level in both classes was diverse, and there were
frequent disciplinary issues. Once a week, a supplementary teacher aided Lena during
geometry lessons by taking twelve advanced students out of the classroom and teaching them
in parallel. The lessons given by the supplementary teacher were not documented due to
research constraints.
On average, roughly 34% of lesson time in Lena's classes was dedicated to whole-class work
and the rest to student-work (see Table 3). During the time allotted for student-work, Lena
commonly attended to individual students or to small group of students.
The year of data collection was the first year Lena had used Textbook C. In the concluding
teacher interview Lena conveyed that she planned her lessons by reviewing Textbook C and
its teacher's guide: "I read through the teacher's guide in order to see what, to first see 'why',
how the lesson opens, what the aim of that opening is, and then I read all the explanations on
the side [e.g., relating to the level of difficulty of each task]". However, Lena revealed that
she thinks the textbook was unsuitable at times for students with low achievements: "I felt
that my class was not at its level, because it's a textbook that attends to students that are
already at a certain level". Indeed, Lena occasionally used other textbooks as a source of
introductory exercises and activities.
Section 4.2 – Part II: Textbooks, teachers, and students | 36
4.2.1.2. Millie and her classes
Millie (pseudonym) received a college bachelor's degree in business management, and later
received her teaching credentials in mathematics from a teachers' college, in a teaching
certification program for those holding an academic degree. At the beginning of the year of
data collection Millie had three years of experience teaching math, all at the junior-high level.
The school was a secular junior-high school (grades 7-9), located in a town. The year of data
collection was Millie's fourth year teaching at this school. The school was categorized by the
Israeli Ministry of Education to be in the upper 30th percentile of the Socio-Economic Status
index (SES). When observations began in December 2015, there were eight 7th grade classes
in the school and two classes for lower-track students (Mitzuy). Each lower-track class
comprised students from four classrooms. In late March 2016, the lower-track classes were
disassembled, and students rejoined their original classes.
Millie taught two 7th grade classes: When observations began, Class M1 with 32 students
(main stream), and Class M2 with 20 students (lower-track). After the lower-track classes
were disassembled: Class M1 with 35 students (32 stayed from the original M1), and Class
M2 with 30 students (5 stayed from the original M2). Observations suggest that most of
Millie's students actively participated in the classroom and there were very few disciplinary
issues. On average, roughly 86% of lesson time was dedicated to whole-class work and the
rest to student work (see Table 3).
The year of data collection was the fourth year Millie had used Textbook C. In the concluding
teacher interview Millie conveyed that she liked the way the textbook presented mathematics
to students by using real-life examples, and that she relied mostly on it when planning her
lessons: "I might use other textbooks, like Mishbetzet [i.e., Textbook E] for additional
exercises, but not for lesson planning – for the lesson, I [used] solely the textbook. I really,
really love it".
Table 3. Duration of observed lesson sections by classroom (in minutes and percentages)
Section Class Total
L1 L2 M1 M2 Lena Millie
Whole-class work 168 (40%) 140 (29%) 403 (85%) 507 (88%) 308 (34%) 469 (86%)
Student work 250 (60%) 347 (71%) 83 (15%) 69 (12%) 597 (66%) 152 (14%)
Total (100%) 418 487 544 576 905 1120
37 | Methodology
4.2.2. Data sources
Data sources included lesson observations and teacher interviews.
Data from lessons introducing each of the selected mathematical statements were recorded via
videotaped observations, audio recordings, and field notes, taking the role of a non-participant
observer (Sabar Ben-Yehoshua, 2001). A single video camera was used. The camera was
operated by the researcher and was positioned such that it will record the whiteboard and the
teacher for the entire duration of the lesson. An audio recorder was placed on the teacher's
desk, in order to improve the voice recording quality of both the teacher and the students.
Student individual work was recorded intermittently in field notes.
Due to research constraints, only three mathematical statements (out of the 10 analyzed in
Part I of the study) could be observed in all four classes. Four additional statements were
observed in at least two classes (of the same teacher), a total of 49 lesson observations (11-14
per class, lesson unit length is 45 minutes, see Table 4).
Table 4. Number of lesson observations, by classroom and mathematical statement
Mathematical statement Class
L1 L2 M1 M2
Performing valid operations on an equation yields an equivalent equation. 4 4 4 4
The area formula for a disk with radius r is πr2. 1 2 4 4
Vertically opposite angles are congruent. 2 2 1 2
Additional observations:
The product of two negative numbers is a positive number. 0 0 2 2
The corresponding angles between parallel lines are equal. 0 0 1 2
The angle sum of a triangle is 180o. 2 2 0 0
The area formula for a trapezium with bases a,b and altitude h is (a + b).h/2. 2 2 0(*) 0(*)
Total 11 12 12 14
(*)This mathematical statement was analyzed to a limited extent, based on the documents Millie's
students received as part of a remote learning activity.
Semi-structured interviews were held during the summer vacation following the final
classroom observations and recorded via audio recordings (see Appendix for a copy of the
interview questions, in Hebrew). The interview questions were developed in collaboration
with 1-3 additional colleagues, and the aims of each section and of each question were
discussed. Additionally, a pilot interview was conducted. Following it, slight phrasing
adjustments were made in order to make certain items sound more natural.
Section 4.2 – Part II: Textbooks, teachers, and students | 38
The interviews dealt with the ways in which each teacher perceived aspects of explanation
and justification, and her ways of addressing these aspects in her two classes. The interview
questions comprised three sections: (i) background, (ii) teacher-textbook-classroom
dynamics, and (iii) paths of justification. In the following I describe each part.
The first section focused on the teacher's background. The questions dealt with the teacher's
academic studies, teaching experience, and motivation for becoming a teacher.
The second section focused on the teacher-textbook-classroom dynamics. The questions dealt
with the teacher's perspectives on the similarities and differences between her two classes, her
use of the textbook and of other resources when she planned lessons (e.g., colleagues, the
internet, or other textbooks), and the ways in which teaching a lesson in one class influenced
the planned lesson in her other classroom.
The third and last section focused on the paths of justification. The section started by
discussing the teacher's approach to explanation and justification in the seventh grade. The
questions dealt with whether, why, and when it is necessary to explain why mathematical
statements are true. In addition, the questions involved the issue of justification for topics that
were taught in elementary school, and whether justification in seventh grade should be the
same as in higher grades.
Then, the teachers were shown sets of paths of justifications for three statements – vertical
angles, product of negatives, and area of a disk. A set of three paths per mathematical
statements was shown. Each set illustrated existing paths, either in the analyzed textbooks or
in the observed classes (see a set of three paths for product of negatives in Figure 4). The sets
were introduced as illustrating paths of justification suggested by other teachers who
participated in the study – each row in the figure represents a full path of justification by one
teacher, and is independent from the other rows. The teachers were asked to describe what
they like and dislike about each path, to construct an "ideal path of justification" for that
statement, and to describe how such a path might fare in a classroom.
39 | Methodology
Figure 4. A set of paths of justification for product of negatives (Interview item)
4.2.3. Data analysis
Approximately 75% of the data were coded by 1-4 additional researchers, all familiar with the
conceptual framework used in this study (Krippendorf’s alpha was 0.86). The coding was
discussed among the coders in one of two ways: a) each member coded a path of justification
separately (35% of the paths), or b) I presented my coding of a path of justification to my
colleagues (40% of the paths). For each path, one code was consensually decided.
Analysis was based on the methods described in Part I and comprised five stages:
1. Outlining the teaching sequence in each observed lesson.
(i) Watching the video recording of each classroom observation several times.
(ii) Segmenting each lesson into blocks (e.g., general assembly, student work), and
parsing each block into separate sections based on the topic at hand.
(iii) Transcribing the parts of each lesson dealing with the mathematical statement, and
translating the parts of the transcript that are cited in this dissertation.
Section 4.2 – Part II: Textbooks, teachers, and students | 40
Figure 5 shows an outline of the teaching sequence for area of a trapezium in Lena's classes. It
describes the main sections of the lesson, along with graphic representations of the duration
of each section in each class.
Class L1 Class L2 Activity (student grouping)
9 minutes
9 minutes
Administration
Non-academic activities (e.g., management, announcements, discipline)
6 minutes
5 minutes
Recap and Defining a trapezium (Whole class)
Lesson goal – finding the area of a trapezium by using known area formulae.
Recap of the area formulae for rectangle, square, triangle, and parallelogram.
Defining a trapezium as a quadrilateral with two parallel sides.
–
3 minutes
Trapezium dissections (Whole class)
In L2: Lena asks for ways to dissect a trapezium into the known shapes.
Several options are suggested [ , , , ], and Lena discusses the
potential efficiency of the dissections.
10 minutes
10 minutes
Calculating the area of a trapezium numerically (Whole class)
Lena sketches a trapezium dissected into a rectangle and two triangles, and
provides the measures for each segment. Lena instructs the class to calculate
the area of each part separately and add them together.
21 minutes
23 minutes
Calculating the area of a trapezium (Individual student work)
Students work on textbook tasks: calculating the area of a trapezium by using
known area formulae, and identifying trapezia by their definition.
9 minutes
11 minutes
Justifying the area formula for a trapezium (Whole class)
In L2: Lena relies on the intermediate results achieved earlier by the students
and begins89 min a process of rearranging these results in order to derive the
area formula. However, this process is not completed, and instead Lena writes
the general area formula.
In both classes: Lena then draws a diagonal to dissect a given trapezium into
two triangles, and obtains the general area formula: altitude*(short base + long
base)/2.
26 minutes
28 minutes
Calculating the area of a trapezium (Individual student work)
Students continue working on textbook tasks by using the area formula.
81 minutes 89 minutes
Figure 5. Outline of the teaching sequence for area of a trapezium in Lena's classes
2. Identifying instances of justification for each statement, in each classroom. I Compiled a
list of elements that explain and/or justify the mathematical statement – including
41 | Methodology
elements that may serve didactical purposes only (e.g., offering mnemonics, invoking
students' intuition, or affirming the statement) and elements that may serve as a precursor
for conjecture (e.g., an activity that aims at an identification of a pattern). Figure 6 and
Figure 7 present two instances for area of a trapezium, both in Lena's classes.
Figure 6. Experimental demonstration by Dissection (Screenshot in Class L1)
Figure 7. Concordance of a rule with a model by Dissection (Screenshot in Class L2)
3. Coding each instance of justification for two attributes: the justification strategy and the
justification type (following Stacey & Vincent, 2009). For example, the justification
strategy underlying both the item in Figure 6 and the item in Figure 7 was Dissection.
However, the item in Figure 6 was coded as an experimental demonstration, whereas the
item in Figure 7 was coded as a Concordance of a rule with a model.
4. Visually representing the paths of justification for each statement, in each observed
classroom (22 paths in total). This stage of analysis is identical to the stage described in
Part I of this study.
Section 4.2 – Part II: Textbooks, teachers, and students | 42
5. Comparative analyses of two aspects of the paths of justification: (1) the characteristics of
the instances of justification (i.e., justification strategies and types) and (2) the order of
the instances of justification. In order to address the textbook-teacher-classroom
dynamics, two comparisons were made: (i) between classes of the same teacher, and (ii)
between Textbook C and the classes of a single teacher. Due to research constrains,
comparison between teachers involved limiting the analysis to the three mathematical
statements that were observed in all four classes: Equivalent equations, Area of a disk,
and Vertical angles. The other two comparisons were made by using the entire data pool.
In the following chapters I present my results.
Chapter 5 and Chapter 6 focus on results related to my first research question, dealing with
the opportunities offered to students in 7th grade Israeli mathematics textbooks to learn how to
explain and justify mathematical statements. More specifically, Chapter 5 focuses on types of
justification, and Chapter 6 focuses on justification strategies.
Chapter 7 and Chapter 8 focus on results related to my second research question, dealing with
the ways in which the textbook, together with the teacher and the students, shape these
opportunities in the classroom. More specifically, Chapter 7 focuses on Lena's classes, and
Chapter 8 focuses on Millie's classes.
In Chapter 9 I discuss my findings and their implications.
43 | Types of justification in the textbooks
5. Types of justification in the textbooks
In this chapter I focus on a meta-level characteristic of the justifications offered in the
textbooks – the types of justification. I address four aspects regarding the types of
justification in the analyzed textbooks: (1) The types of justification offered, (2) comparison
of the types of justification across textbooks, (3) comparison of the types of justification
across mathematical statements, (4) The paths of justification in the textbook, focusing on the
types of justification.
Analysis reveals that Israeli 7th grade mathematics textbooks provided justifications for all
analysed statements – all but one statement in one textbook. A total of 183 instances of
justification were found for the ten analysed mathematical statements.
Table 5 presents the frequencies of instances of justification by textbook section. Analysis
reveals that justifications for the analysed statements were typically included in the
introductory sections and in tasks intended for a general-assembly class discussion (89%),
and seldom in tasks intended for student individual or small-group work. However, both
textbook sections offered many opportunities for justification of other mathematical claims,
which were not analyzed in this study. A similar pattern was found in all textbooks (except
textbook A), regardless of the target student population, and across all analyzed statements.
Table 5. Frequencies of instances of justifications, by textbook section
Textbook Section Textbook Total
A B C D E F G H
Introductory sections 19 20 21 18 22 26 18 19 163
Student work 12 2 0 6 0 0 0 0 20
Total 31 22 21 24 22 26 18 19 183
Section 5.1 – The types of justification offered | 44
5.1. The types of justification offered
Six out of the seven types of justification in Stacey and Vincent’s (2009) framework were
identified in the Israeli textbooks – all but Qualitative analogy. In the following I provide
examples for each type.
5.1.1. Appeal to authority: This type of justification was defined as a reliance on external
sources of authority (e.g., a mathematician or a calculator). Figure 8 illustrates an instance of
this type in justification of the product of negatives. Students calculated an assortment of
products of directed numbers by using a calculator, examined the results for patterns, and
summarized their observations. The justification relies both on the students' ability to find a
pattern based on a limited number of specific examples and on the authority of the calculator
in order to determine that the product of two negative numbers is positive. However, I coded
this as an appeal to authority because of the reliance on the calculator to carry out the
multiplications of negative numbers.
Figure 8. Appeal to authority (adapted from Textbook G, vol 2, pp. 61-62)
5.1.2. Qualitative analogy: This type of justification was defined as an analogy that relies on
a superficial similarity between a mathematical concept and a non-mathematical situation.
This analogy does not reflect the underlying mathematical principle and cannot qualify as a
model. No instances of this type of justification were found in the textbook.
45 | Types of justification in the textbooks
5.1.3. Experimental Demonstration: This type of justification was defined as a pattern that
emerges after checking either one or more specific examples. Figure 9 illustrates an instance
of this type in justification of the angle sum of a triangle. The students were instructed to cut
triangles out of a piece of paper, tear these triangles such that each piece contains one angle
of the triangle, and rearrange the three angles, in order to convince themselves that the angle
sum in a triangle is a straight angle (see Figure 9).
Figure 9. Experimental demontration (Textbook B, vol 3, p.161)
5.1.4. Concordance of a rule with a model: This type of justification was defined as a result
of a comparison of the results obtained in two ways – by using a rule and by using a model.
Figure 10 illustrates an instance of this type in justification of the area of a trapezium. The
areas of several trapeziums were computed in two ways – with and without using the formula
that was previously derived. The essence of the justification is in the correspondence of the
answers obtained in two ways – by using a visual model and by using the formula (the rule).
Figure 10. Concordance of a rule with a model (Textbook D, vol 2, p. 186)
Section 5.1 – The types of justification offered | 46
5.1.5. Deduction using a model: This type of justification was defined as a model which is
used to illustrate the mathematical structure underlying the justification. Figure 11 illustrates
an instance of this type in justification of equivalent equations. A given equation of the form
Ax+B=Cx+D was translated into a balance scale model, and pairs of objects of either known
or unknown weights were repeatedly removed from both sides of the scales, thus maintaining
equilibrium. This justification is based on a structural similarity between the scales (the
model) and the balanced equations (the mathematics involved).
Figure 11. Deduction using a model (Textbook H, vol 3, p. 55)
5.1.6. Deduction using a specific case: This type of justification was defined as a process of
inference which is based on a generic example. Figure 12 illustrates an instance of this type
in justification of the area of a trapezium. The area formula of a trapezium was justified by
forming a chain of reasoning, in which each step was logically deduced from previous steps.
The given measures were intended as a generic case (i.e., the specific given values can be
replaced without loss of generality).
Figure 12. Deduction using a specific case (Textbook B, vol 2, p. 195)
47 | Types of justification in the textbooks
5.1.7. Deduction using a general case: This type of justification was defined as a process of
inference which is based on the general case. Figure 13 illustrates an instance of this type in
justification of the area of a trapezium. The area formula of a trapezium was justified by
forming a chain of reasoning, in which each step was logically deduced from previous steps.
Pronumerals were used to denote the measures of the bases of the trapezium and its altitude.
Figure 13. Deduction using a general case (Textbook B, vol 2, p. 196)
Section 5.2 – Types of justification across textbooks | 48
5.2. Types of justification across textbooks
Figure 14 presents the relative frequencies of the types of justification in the textbooks,
grouped in three categories – Deductive, Empirical, and External justification (following
Harel & Sowder, 1998, 2007). The relative frequencies of deductive justifications ranged
between 39%-81%, yet were similar across six of the textbooks, comprising roughly two-
thirds of the instances of justification. External types of justification were rare, accounting for
less than 1% of all instances of justification in the textbooks.
Figure 14. Relative frequencies of the types of justification in the textbooks, by category
A further analysis involved a breakdown of the categories by using the framework suggested
by Stacey and Vincent (2009). Table 6 presents the frequencies for each type of justification,
by textbook. As can be seen, the total number of instances of justification was between 18-31
instances per textbook. Noticeable variation was found in the frequencies of three types – one
empirical and two deductive: Experimental demonstration, Deduction using a specific case,
and Deduction using a general case. Nevertheless, these three justification types constituted
most of the instances of justification in the analyzed textbooks. For example, the two
deductive types accounted for 46-67% of the instances in seven of the textbooks and 33% in
Textbook G. The two external types of justification – Appeal to authority and Qualitative
analogy – were either extremely rare or entirely absent in the textbooks.
49 | Types of justification in the textbooks
Table 7 presents the average number of instances of justification, by type and textbook scope.
The comparison focused on seven out of the ten mathematical statements due to the structure
of textbooks of limited scope. The other three statements were introduced in the first volume
of each textbook, and including them would have prevented comparison between the pairs of
textbooks that have a common first volume – textbooks B and G, and textbooks C and H.
While no significant differences were found for justification types across the textbooks, a
noticeable difference was found for deduction using a general case. Textbooks of limited
scope (Textbooks G-H) offered fewer instances of justification involving deduction using a
general case compared with textbooks of standard/expanded scope (Textbooks A-F) –
roughly one-third the number. Comparison between Textbooks B and G, and between
Textbooks C and H, revealed similar ratios (7:2 and 2:1, respectively).
Table 6. Frequencies of types of justification, by textbook
Type of justification Textbook Total (%)
A B C D E F G H
External
Appeal to authority - - - - - - 1 - 1 (0%)
Qualitative analogy - - - - - - - - 0 (0%)
Empirical
Experimental demonstration 6 9 4 9 4 9 9 5 55 (30%)
Concordance of a rule with a model 2 1 - 2 3 3 1 - 12 (7%)
Deductive
Deduction using a model 7 1 3 2 3 2 1 3 22 (12%)
Deduction using a specific case 8 4 10 5 10 5 4 9 55 (30%)
Deduction using a general case 8 7 4 6 2 7 2 2 38 (21%)
Total 31 22 21 24 22 26 18 19 183 (100%)
Table 7. Average number of instances for types of justification, by textbook scope
Type of justification Textbook scope Total (S.D.)
Standard Scope Limited Scope
External
Appeal to authority 0 0.5 0.1 (0.3)
Qualitative analogy 0 0 0 (0)
Empirical
Experimental demonstration 6 6.5 6.1 (2)
Concordance of a rule with a model 0.7 0 0.5 (0.5)
Deductive
Deduction using a model 1.2 0.5 1 (1.2)
Deduction using a specific case 3.7 3.5 3.6 (2.2)
Deduction using a general case 5.7 2 4.8 (2.4)
Section 5.3 – Types of justification across mathematical statements | 50
5.3. Types of justification across mathematical statements
Table 8 presents the frequencies of types of justification, by mathematical statement. As can
be seen, the number of instances varied greatly across the statements, between 8-39 instances
per statement. Furthermore, there was a great variation in the frequencies of almost every
type (all but the rarely used one) across the statements.
Analysis of the types of justification offered in the textbooks suggests that they were used to
different extents for algebra and geometry statements (see Figure 15): Statements involving
algebra were typically justified by two deductive types – either deduction using a specific
case or deduction using a model (Figure 15(a)); Statements involving geometry were usually
justified by an empirical type – experimental demonstration as well as by two deductive types
– either deduction using a general case or deduction using a specific case (Figure 15(b)).
Algebra Geometry
(a) (b)
Figure 15. Frequencies of types of justification by topic and textbook
Additional analysis focused on the three most commonly used types of justification (i.e.,
experimental demonstration and deduction using a specific/general case). This analysis
further suggests there were differences based on the content topic (see Table 8): Deduction
using a general case was offered exclusively for geometry statements, whereas deduction
using a specific case was offered mainly for statements involving algebra (i.e., including area
of a trapezium). In contrast, Experimental demonstration was used in justification of
statements both in algebra and in geometry.
51 | Types of justification in the textbooks
a=
appea
l to a
uth
ority; q
=qualita
tive analo
gy; e=
experim
enta
l dem
onstra
tion
; r=co
nco
rdan
ce of a
rule w
ith a
model; m
=ded
uctio
n u
sing
a
model; s=
ded
uctio
n u
sing a
specific ca
se; g=
ded
uctio
n u
sing a
gen
eral ca
se.
Tota
l
g s
m
Ded
uctiv
e
r e
Em
pirical
q
a
Extern
al
Justification
type
Tab
le 8. F
requen
cies of ty
pes o
f justificatio
n, b
y m
athem
atical statemen
t
20
-
10
4 - 6 - -
Equiv
alent
expressio
ns
Alg
ebra S
tatemen
ts
17
-
16
1 - - - -
Div
ision
by zero
17
- - 9 8 - - -
Distrib
utiv
e
law
12
- - 6 1
5 - -
Equiv
alent
equatio
ns
15
- 5
2 - 7 - 1
Pro
duct o
f
neg
atives
39
10
14
- 3
12
- -
Area o
f a
trapeziu
m
Geo
metry
Statem
ents
8
8 - - - - - -
Area o
f a
disk
16
7
5 - - 4 - -
Vertical
angles
13
2
2 - - 9 - -
Corresp
.
angles
26
11
3 - -
12
- -
Angle su
m o
f
a triangle
183
38
55
22
12
55
0
1
Tota
l
Section 5.4 – Sequences of types of justification | 52
5.4. Sequences of types of justification
Analysis of the paths of justification focused on three attributes: (1) path length – the number
of instances of justification offered in a textbook for each mathematical statement; (2)
characteristics – the types of justification included in each path; and (3) sequencing – the
order in which types of justification were offered in the textbook. Table 9 presents the paths
of justification for each mathematical statement, by textbook, focusing on justification types.
Analysis of path lengths revealed that the number of instances of justification offered in a
textbook for each mathematical statement varied considerably, between one and six instances
of justification per path. As can be seen in Table 9, path lengths varied both for different
statements in the same textbook, and for the same statement across textbooks. For example,
in Textbook A, the path for the product of negatives included four instances, but only one for
the area of a disk; In Textbook F the path for the product of negatives included one instance.
Table 10 presents the average lengths of the paths of justification for each mathematical
statement, by textbook scope. The average path length was 2.29 instances (1-4.88 instances
per path). Short paths were thus defined as paths including either one or two instances of
justification, and long paths were defined as including three or more instances. As can be
seen, 52 paths were coded as short, 27 as long, and one as neither – no justification was given
for the area of a disk in Textbook E. For most statements, average paths lengths were
generally slightly shorter in textbooks of limited scope, compared with textbooks of
standard/expanded scope (7 of 10 statements). No differences were found in path lengths
between algebra and geometry statements.
Analysis of the characteristics of the instances of justification revealed a strong preference to
deductive types of justification. Paths of justification often included more than one type of
justification (45 of 80) – typically both empirical and deductive (38 of 45), and occasionally
only deductive types (7 of 45). Paths that included just one justification type (34 of 80) were
usually deductive (22 of 34). Further analysis compared short and long paths. Purely
deductive paths were more common in short paths (26 of 52) compared with long paths (3 of
27). Long paths typically included both empirical and deductive justification types (24 of 27).
53 | Types of justification in the textbooks
a=
appea
l to
auth
ority;
e=exp
erimen
tal
dem
onstra
tion
; r=
conco
rdance
of
a
rule
with
a
model;
m=
ded
uctio
n
usin
g
a
model;
s=ded
uctio
n u
sing a
specific ca
se; g=
ded
uctio
n u
sing a
gen
eral ca
se.
H
G
F
E
D
C
B
A Textbook
Tab
le 9. P
aths o
f justificatio
n fo
rmed
by ty
pes o
f justificatio
n, b
y tex
tbook an
d statem
ent.
m,s
e,s
s,e,s
m,e,s
e,s
m,s
e,s
e,s,m,s
Equiv
alent
expressio
ns
Alg
ebra S
tatemen
ts
s,s,s
s s,s
s,s
s,s,s
s,s,s
s s,m
Div
ision
by zero
m
m,r
m,r,r
m,r,r
m,m
,r
m
m,r
m,r
Distrib
utiv
e
law
m
e m,e,r
m,e
e m
e m,m
Equiv
alent
equatio
ns
e a s e,s
e,s
e,s
e,e
m,s,e,m
Pro
duct o
f
neg
atives
e,s,s,s
e,e,g,e
e,e,e,g,g
s,s,s,r
e,e,e,g,r,g
e,s,s,s,g
e,s,g,g
,g
s,g,r,s,s,s
Area o
f a
trapeziu
m
Geo
metry
Statem
ents
g
g
g,g
–
g
g
g
g
Area o
f a
disk
s,g
e,s
e,g
s,g
g
s,g
s,g
e,e,g
Vertical
angles
s,e
e,e
e s e,e
e e e,g,g
Corresp
.
angles
e,e
e,s
e,e,g,g
e,s,g
e,g,g
e,s,g
e,e,e,g,g
e,g,g
,g
Angle su
m o
f
a triangle
Section 5.4 – Sequences of types of justification | 54
Table 10. Average path lengths, by statement and textbook scope.
Mathematical statement Textbook scope Total
Standard Scope Limited Scope
Equivalent expressions 2.67 2 2.5
Division by zero 2.17 2 2.13
Distributive law 2.3 1.5 2.13
Equivalent equations 1.67 1 1.5
Product of negatives 2.17 1 1.88
Area of a trapezium 5.17 4 4.88
Area of a disk 1 1 1
Vertical angles 2 2 2
Corresponding angles 1.5 2 1.63
Angle sum of a triangle 3.67 2 3.25
Total 2.43 1.85 2.29
Analysis of the sequencing in the paths of justification focused on the three most commonly
used types (see Table 6) – an empirical type (Experimental demonstration) and two deductive
types (Deduction using a specific/general case). The analysis suggests that in almost all paths
that included the empirical type and either deductive type, Experimental demonstration
preceded the deductive types (25 of 28). Similarly, in paths that included both Deduction
using a specific case and Deduction using a general case, a generic example always preceded
the general case (9 of 9).
Further analysis focused on sequences involving Deduction using a general case (27 of 80
paths, all in geometry). The analysis reveals that the general case was not always preceded by
a generic example – only a relatively small fraction of these paths involved Deduction using
a specific case (33%, 9 of 27). Other paths involved either Experimental demonstration (10
of 27) or just one type of justification (8 of 27).
55 | Justification strategies in the textbooks
6. Justification strategies in the textbooks
In this chapter I focus on a content-specific characteristic of the instances of justification –
the justification strategies offered in the textbooks. I describe and illustrate the strategies
offered in paths of justification for the 10 analysed statements.
6.1. Equivalent expressions
Three justification strategies were used in the analyzed textbooks for justifying why two
algebraic expressions are equivalent if one expression can be transformed into the other by
performing a sequence of valid operations for a common domain of numbers. All three
justification strategies are addressed and reviewed in the mathematics education literature: (i)
Rules and conventions (Kieran, 1992, 2006), (ii) Substitution (Kieran & Sfard, 1999; Tabach
& Friedlander, 2008; Tirosh et al., 1998), and (iii) Description equivalence (Kieran & Sfard,
1999; Tabach & Friedlander, 2008; Zwetzschler & Prediger, 2013). Additional warrants are
mentioned in the literature yet were not found in the analyzed textbooks (e.g., relying on a
functional approach and comparing the graphs of functions described by each of the algebraic
expressions, see Kieran & Sfard, 1999). In this section I address two aspects: (1) The
justification strategies offered, in descending order of frequency in the textbooks; and (2) The
paths of justification.
The justification strategies offered
6.1.1. Rules and conventions: This justification strategy is based on an extension of
properties of arithmetic operations from numbers to pronumerals, by relying on students'
elementary school knowledge. Instances of this justification strategy in the textbooks
involved various arithmetic facts to justify equivalence of algebraic equivalence, such as the
definition of multiplication as repeated addition (e.g., Figure 16) and the associative and
commutative properties (e.g., Figure 17).
Figure 16. Deduction using a specific case by Rules & conventions (Textbook D, vol 1, p. 43)
Section 6.1 – Equivalent expressions | 56
Figure 17. Deduction using a specific case by Rules & conventions (Textbook A, vol 1, p. 188)
6.1.2. Substitution: This justification strategy is based on an inductive process, in which
selected values are substituted for the variable in two algebraic expressions. The equivalence
of the two expressions is validated if identical results are achieved in both expressions for
each of the selected examples (e.g., Figure 18).
Figure 18. Experimental demonstration by Substitution (Textbook A, vol 1, p. 26)
This justification strategy is generally not a valid method of justifying the equivalence of two
algebraic expressions, except for when it is possible to exhaust the domain. Underlying this
warrant is an alternative meaning for the equivalence of algebraic expressions. This definition
states that two expressions are equivalent if the substitution of all numbers in the expressions
will produce equal results for their common domain (Tabach & Friedlander, 2008;
Zwetzschler & Prediger, 2013).
6.1.3. Description equivalence: This justification strategy is based on modelling a given
situation in two distinct ways in order to construct two algebraic expressions. Instances of
this justification strategy in the textbooks involved either relying on two viewpoints or using
two counting methods (e.g., calculating the perimeter of a polygon by grouping different
sides or by working in different order, see Figure 19).
57 | Justification strategies in the textbooks
Figure 19. Deduction using a model by Description equivalence (Textbook C, vol 1, p. 57)
The algebraic transformation (or sequence of transformations) between the two expressions
can be established by validating each viewpoint or counting method. Underlying this warrant
is an alternative meaning for the equivalence of algebraic expressions. This definition states
that two expressions are equivalent if they describe the same phenomenon – the same
geometric pattern, the same situation, or the same object (Tabach & Friedlander, 2008;
Zwetzschler & Prediger, 2013).
The Paths of justification
Table 11 summarizes the frequencies of the justification strategies offered in Israeli 7th grade
mathematics textbooks for the mathematical statement equivalent expressions. As can be
seen, justification was offered in every textbook. Moreover, every textbook offered a path
based on two or three justification strategies, one of which being rules and conventions,
which is often considered to be the more mathematically sound strategy.
Figure 20 presents the paths of justification offered in the textbooks for this mathematical
statement. As can be seen, paths opened in any of the three justification strategies. However,
description equivalence was commonly offered at the beginning of the paths (whenever it
was offered), and rules and conventions was always the last justification strategy offered.
Further analysis of the paths, focused on both characteristics of each instance of justification
Table 11. Equivalent expressions – frequencies of justification strategies, by textbook
Justification strategy Textbook Total
A B C D E F G H
Rules and conventions 2 1 1 1 1 2 1 1 10
Substitution 1 1 . 1 1 1 1 . 6
Description equivalence 1 . 1 . 1 . . 1 4
Total 4 2 2 2 3 3 2 2 20
Section 6.1 – Equivalent expressions | 58
(i.e., justification strategy and type), suggests that most paths offered a shift from concrete to
abstract. Seven paths began either with the empirical experimental demonstration or with a
visual strategy relying on a deduction using a model, and all paths ended with generic
examples, relying on the more formal type of justification deduction using a specific case.
In justification of equivalent expressions, the Israeli school curriculum for grades 7-9
suggests one justification strategy: rules and conventions (Israel Ministry of Education,
2009). As Figure 20 shows, this justification strategy was offered in every textbook – at least
once and at the beginning of the path.
Textbook Path of justification
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
e=experimental demonstration; m/s=deduction using a model / a specific case.
Figure 20. Equivalent expressions – Paths of justification
Substitution
e
Conventions
s
Description
m
Conventions
s
Substitution
e
Conventions
s
Description
m
Conventions
s
Substitution
e
Conventions
s
Description
m
Substitution
e
Conventions
s
Conventions
s
Substitution
e
Conventions
s
Substitution
e
Conventions
s
Description
m
Conventions
s
59 | Justification strategies in the textbooks
6.2. Division by zero
Two justification strategies were used in the analyzed textbooks for justifying why Division
by zero is undefined. Both justification strategies are addressed and reviewed in the
mathematics education literature (Crespo & Nicol, 2006; Kim, 2007; Knifong & Burton,
1980; Tsamir & Sheffer, 2000; J. M. Watson, 1991): (i) The inverse of multiplication, and (ii)
Repeated Subtraction. Additional warrants are mentioned in the literature yet were not found
in the analyzed textbooks (e.g., relying on an intuitive notion of limit of the sequence of
reciprocals of the natural numbers, see Tsamir & Sheffer, 2000; Watson, 1991). In this
section I address two aspects: (1) The justification strategies offered, in descending order of
frequency in the textbooks; and (2) The paths of justification.
The justification strategies offered
6.2.1. The inverse of multiplication: This justification strategy is based on treating division
as the inverse of multiplication. Instances of this justification strategy in the textbooks
involved either the case a:0 (a≠0), by relying on the fact that zero has no multiplicative
inverse (e.g., Figure 21), or the case 0:0, by relying on the definition of division as an
operation with a unique result (e.g., Figure 22).
Figure 21. Deduction using a specific case by Inverse of multiplication (Textbook B, vol 1, p. 80)
Section 6.2 – Division by zero | 60
Figure 22. Deduction using a specific case by Inverse of multiplication (Textbook F, vol 1, p. 31)
6.2.2. Repeated subtraction: This justification strategy is based on modelling division as
repeated subtraction. First, a defined case is introduced (e.g., 20:4) and the question "How
many times should one subtract 4 from 20 to reach 0?" is discussed. Then, an undefined case
is introduced (e.g., 20:0) and the question "How many times should one subtract 0 from 20 to
reach 0?" is discussed. Since there is no real number that answers this question, this case
must be left undefined (e.g., Figure 23).
Figure 23. Deduction using a a model by Repeated subtraction (Textbook A, vol 1, p. 64)
The Paths of justification
Table 12 summarizes the frequencies of the justification strategies offered in Israeli 7th grade
mathematics textbooks for the mathematical statement division by zero. As can be seen,
justifications were offered in every textbook, commonly more than one instance of
justification per path. Every textbook offered the inverse of multiplication, which is often
seen as a mathematically sound strategy. One textbook offered repeated subtraction as well.
Table 12. Division by zero – frequencies of justification strategies, by textbook.
Justification strategy Textbook Total
A B C D E F G H
The inverse of multiplication 1 1 3 3 2 2 1 3 16
Repeated subtraction 1 . . . . . . . 1
Total 2 1 3 3 2 2 1 3 17
61 | Justification strategies in the textbooks
Figure 24 presents the paths of justification offered in the textbooks for this mathematical
statement. As can be seen, all textbooks offered a path based on the inverse of multiplication,
dealing with the case a:0 (a≠0). Five textbooks proceeded to attend to the case 0:0 as well.
One textbook offered both justification strategies as equals, and requested the student to
decide which of the two strategies is more convincing.
Further analysis of the paths, focused on both characteristics of each instance of justification
(i.e., justification strategy and type), suggests that the inverse of multiplication was associated
in each instance with deduction using a specific case, thus relying on a generic example to
justify why division by zero is undefined.
In justification of division by zero, the Israeli school curriculum for grades 7-9 suggests one
justification strategy: the inverse of multiplication, and attends to the case 0:0 as well (Israel
Ministry of Education, 2009). As Figure 24 shows, this justification strategy was offered in
every textbook – at least once and at the beginning of the path.
Textbook Path of justification
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
m=deduction using a model; s=deduction using a specific case.
Figure 24. Division by zero – Paths of justification
Inverse a:0
s
Subtraction
m
Inverse a:0
s
Inverse a:0
s
Inverse a:0
s
Inverse 0:0
s
Inverse a:0
s
Inverse a:0
s
Inverse 0:0
s
Inverse a:0
s
Inverse 0:0
s
Inverse a:0
s
Inverse 0:0
s
Inverse a:0
s
Inverse a:0
s
Inverse a:0
s
Inverse 0:0
s
Section 6.3 – Distributive law | 62
6.3. Distributive law
Two justification strategies were used in the analyzed textbooks for justifying why
a*(b+c)=a*b+a*c for any three numbers a, b, c. Both justification strategies are addressed
and reviewed in the mathematics education literature: (i) Area / array (B. Davis & Simmt,
2006; Ding & Li, 2014; Lampert, 1986; Wu, 1999), and (ii) Arithmetic conventions (Lampert,
1986). Additional warrants are mentioned in the literature yet were not found in the analyzed
textbooks (e.g., relying on grid-based multiplication, see Davis & Simmt, 2006). In this
section I address two aspects: (1) The justification strategies offered, in descending order of
frequency in the textbooks; and (2) The paths of justification.
The justification strategies offered
6.3.1. Area / Array: This justification strategy is based on modelling multiplication of
positive numbers as the area of a rectangle. Instances of this justification strategy in the
textbooks involved calculating either the area of a rectangle with sides "a+b" and "c" (e.g.,
Figure 25), or the number of items in a rectangular array (e.g., Figure 26). In either case, the
result is calculated twice – once as the product of the rectangle's sides, and once as the sum of
the areas of each box. The two algebraic expressions represent different ways of looking at
the same object and are therefore equivalent.
Figure 25. Deduction using a model by Area (Textbook D, vol 1, p. 75)
63 | Justification strategies in the textbooks
Figure 26. Deduction using a model by Array (Textbook E, vol 1, p. 96)
6.3.2. Arithmetic conventions: This justification strategy is based on identifying a
correspondence between the results obtained by using the distributive property and by using
PEMDAS rule (i.e., order of operations: Parentheses; Exponents; Multiplication or Division
(left to right); and Addition or Subtraction (left to right)). Instances of this justification
strategy in the textbooks involved either an abstract setting (e.g., Figure 27) or a word-
problem setting (e.g., Figure 28).
Figure 27. Concordance of a rule with a model by Arith. conventions (Textbook E, vol 1, p. 97)
Figure 28. Concordance of a rule with a model by Arith. conventions (Textbook B, vol 1, p. 72)
Section 6.3 – Distributive law | 64
The Paths of justification
Table 13 summarizes the frequencies of the justification strategies offered in Israeli 7th grade
mathematics textbooks for the mathematical statement the distributive law. As can be seen,
justifications were offered in every textbook, commonly more than one instance of
justification per path. Every textbook offered the more mathematically sound strategy,
area/array, and six textbooks offered arithmetic conventions as well.
Figure 29 presents the paths of justification offered in the textbooks for this mathematical
statement. As can be seen, area/array was offered before arithmetic conventions in every
textbook. Further analysis of the paths, focused on both characteristics of each instance of
justification (i.e., justification strategy and type), suggests that area/array was associated in
each instance with deduction using a model, thus providing a visual model to allow deduction
of the distributive property. In addition, every instance of arithmetic conventions was
associated with concordance of a rule and a model, and was used mainly in order to affirm
the rule which was presented beforehand by using area/array.
In justification of the distributive law, the Israeli school curriculum for grades 7-9 suggests
two justification strategy: area/array, followed by arithmetic conventions, and attends to the
case 0:0 as well (Israel Ministry of Education, 2009). As Figure 29 shows, these justification
strategies were offered in most textbooks – in the same order.
Table 13. Distributive law – frequencies of justification strategies, by textbook.
Justification strategy Textbook Total
A B C D E F G H
Area / Array 1 1 1 2 1 1 1 1 9
Arithmetic conventions 1 1 . 1 2 2 1 . 8
Total 2 2 1 3 3 3 2 1 17
65 | Justification strategies in the textbooks
Textbook Path of justification
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
r=concordance of a rule with a model; m=deduction using a model.
Figure 29. Distributive law – Paths of justification
Area/Array
m
Conventions
r
Area/Array
m
Conventions
r
Area/Array
m
Area/Array
m
Area/Array
m
Conventions
r
Area/Array
m
Conventions
r
Conventions
r
Area/Array
m
Conventions
r
Conventions
r
Area/Array
m
Conventions
r
Area/Array
m
Section 6.4 – Equivalent equations | 66
6.4. Equivalent equations
Four justification strategies were used in the analyzed textbooks for justifying why
performing valid operations on both sides of an equation yields an equivalent equation. All
four justification strategies are addressed and reviewed in the mathematics education
literature: (i) Balance model (e.g., Filloy & Rojano, 1989; Linchevski & Herscovics, 1996;
Vlassis, 2002), (ii) Undoing (e.g., Bernard & Cohen, 1988; Kieran, 1992), (iii) Segment
model (e.g., Dickinson & Eade, 2004); and (iv) Intuitive comparison (e.g., Bernard & Cohen,
1988; Kieran, 1992, 2006). Additional warrants are mentioned in the literature yet were not
found in the analyzed textbooks (e.g., an area model, in which equivalence of equations
corresponds with equal areas, see Filloy & Rojano, 1989). In this section I address two
aspects: (1) The justification strategies offered, in descending order of frequency in the
textbooks; and (2) The paths of justification.
The justification strategies offered
6.4.1. Balance model: This justification strategy is based on modelling an equation as two
sides of a balance scale, with known and unknown weights on each side, representing
constants and variables (respectively). A valid operation on an equation is modelled as a
manipulation on the weights, such that the scales remain balanced (e.g., addition is modelled
as adding identical weights on both sides of the scale). Instances of this justification strategy
in the textbooks involved discussing concrete manipulations that can be performed on a
balance scale without disrupting the balance (e.g., Figure 30).
Figure 30. Deduction using a model by Balance model (Textbook H, vol 3, p. 55)
67 | Justification strategies in the textbooks
The model has several limitations. For example, it relies on a type of scales with which many
junior-high school students are no longer familiar. More importantly, it is valid only for
equations of the form Ax+B=Cx+D, where A,B,C,D are all non-negative numbers. This
limitation stems from the association between numbers and weights, because the magnitude
of weights is non-negative in nature. This limitation was discussed explicitly in the teacher's
guides for three textbooks, and one of these textbooks explicitly addressed this limitation in a
task intended for a whole-class discussion.
6.4.2. Undoing: This justification strategy is based on analyzing an equation as a sequence of
reversible steps that have been applied to an unknown number “x”. In other words, each
invertible operation on an equation is undoing an opposite (inverse) operation that was
performed on the variable. Instances of this justification strategy in the textbooks involved
identifying equal elements in both sides of the equation (e.g., the addition of one, see Figure
31). Each step relies on the students' elementary school experience in recalling number facts
relating to addition, subtraction, multiplication, and division.
Figure 31. Experimental demonstration by Undoing (adapted from Textbook B, vol 2, p. 17)
The process of "undoing" an equation relies on certain students' abilities, such as the ability to
see an algebraic expression as an entity and the ability to find the optimal manipulation to
perform in order to divide an algebraic expression into sub-structures. These abilities are
commonly grouped under the term structure sense in the literature (Hoch & Dreyfus, 2004;
Linchevski & Livneh, 1999; Novotná & Hoch, 2008).
6.4.3. Intuitive comparison: This justification strategy is based on a comparison of results
with an intuitive method of equation solving. Instances of this justification strategy relied on
the cover-up method (e.g., Figure 32) or on unspecified previously taught methods for
solving equations (e.g., Figure 33). The cover-up method involves breaking down an equation
of the form Ax±B=C in a sequence of steps. In each step, the equation is verbalized, and an
Section 6.4 – Equivalent equations | 68
algebraic expression is covered up and is replaced with the question "what is the number for
which". In each step, this question is answered by using elementary arithmetic considerations
(e.g., Figure 32(a)). Then, the same equation is solved by operating on both sides of the
equation, and the results are compared (e.g., the equation 2x-7=15 is solved in two ways in
Figure 32(b), and both results are compared to the result obtained in Figure 32(a)).
(b) (a) Figure 32. Concordanceof a rule w/ model by intuition (adapted from Textbook F, vol 2, p. 135)
Figure 33. Experimental demonstration by intuition (adapted from Textbook D, vol 2, p. 15)
The cover-up method was often employed in the Israeli textbooks in teaching how to solve
equations, along with several other methods. However, the relationship between these
methods and the formal procedure of performing the same operation on both sides of an
69 | Justification strategies in the textbooks
equation was scarcely made explicit. In most cases, the justification strategies were offered
implicitly, by treating each step in the solution as having the same set of solutions as the
original equation but without mentioning explicitly that the two equations are equivalent.
6.4.4. Segment model: This justification strategy is based on modelling an equation as two
segments of equal length, each partitioned into pieces of known and unknown lengths,
representing constants and variables (respectively). A valid operation on an equation is
modelled as a manipulation on the pieces such that the segments remain of equal measures
(e.g., subtraction is modelled as removing pieces of equal lengths from both segments).
Instances of this justification strategy in the textbooks involved using two separate segments
(e.g., Figure 34).
Figure 34. Deduction using a model by Segment model (Textbook A, vol 1, p. 214)
This model was used in some textbooks as a method for solving equations. Such occurrences
were not counted as instances of justification for this mathematical statement.
The Paths of justification
Table 14 summarizes the frequencies of the justification strategies offered in Israeli 7th grade
mathematics textbooks for the mathematical statement equivalent equations. As can be seen,
justifications were offered in every textbook, commonly more than one instance of
justification per path. Four textbooks offered a path based on a combination of several
justification strategies.
Section 6.4 – Equivalent equations | 70
Figure 35 presents the paths of justification offered in the textbooks for this mathematical
statement. As can be seen, paths commonly opened by relying on balance model, and
involved a single type of justification.
In justification of equivalent equations, the Israeli school curriculum for grades 7-9 does not
explicitly offer any justification strategy, yet hints at relying on balance model (Israel
Ministry of Education, 2009). As Figure 35 shows, this justification strategy was offered in
five textbooks – at the beginning of the path.
Textbook Path of justification
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
e=experimental demonstr.; r=concordance of a rule with a model; m=deduction w/ a model.
Figure 35. Equivalent equations – Paths of justification.
Table 14. Equivalent equations – frequencies of justification strategies, by textbook
Justification strategy Textbook Total
A B C D E F G H
Balance model 1 . 1 . 1 1 . 1 5
Undoing . 1 . . 1 . 1 . 3
Intuitive comparison . . . 1 . 2 . . 3
Segment model 1 . . . . . . . 1
Total 2 1 1 1 2 3 1 1 12
Balance
m
Segment
m
Undoing
e
Balance
m
Intuition
e
Balance
m
Undoing
e
Balance
m
Intuition
e
Intuition
r
Undoing
e
Balance
m
71 | Justification strategies in the textbooks
6.5. Product of negatives
Three justification strategies were used in the analyzed textbooks for justifying why the
product of two negative numbers is a positive number. All three justification strategies are
addressed and reviewed in the mathematics education literature: (i) Discovering patterns
(e.g., Arcavi & Bruckheimer, 1981; Askey, 1999; Cable, 1971; J. C. Peterson, 1972); (ii)
Extension of properties (e.g., Arcavi & Bruckheimer, 1981; Brown, 1969; Crowley & Dunn,
1985; Hefendehl-Hebeker, 1991; Rapke, 2008; Sfard, 2000); and (iii) Number-line models
(Arcavi & Bruckheimer, 1981; Brown, 1969; Cable, 1971; Crowley & Dunn, 1985).
Additional warrants are mentioned in the literature yet were not found in the analyzed
textbooks (e.g., a formal axiomatic warrant, involving formally defining integers as ordered
pairs and defining their multiplication, see Arcavi & Bruckheimer, 1981; Brown, 1969; J. C.
Peterson, 1972). In this section I address two aspects: (1) The justification strategies offered,
in descending order of frequency in the textbooks; and (2) The paths of justification.
The justification strategies offered
6.5.1. Discovering patterns: This justification strategy is based on discovery and
extrapolation of patterns. First, patterns are discovered in a sequence of calculations of
products of natural numbers. Then, these patterns are extended from natural numbers to
negative integers. Instances of this justification strategy in the textbooks typically involved
either completing a multiplication table (e.g., Figure 36) or continuing a sequence of
calculations (e.g., Figure 37). Additionally, one textbook involved simply checking several
unrelated specific examples (e.g., Figure 38).
Figure 36. Deduction using a specific case by Discovering patterns (Textbook C, vol 2, p. 42)
Section 6.5 – Product of negatives | 72
Figure 37. Deduction using a specific case by Discovering patterns (Textbook H, vol 2, p. 46)
Figure 38. Appeal to authority by Discov. patterns (adapted from Textbook G, v. 2, pp. 61-62)
A common condition for this extrapolation of traits is that each sequence of products is an
arithmetic sequence (i.e., with a constant difference between successive values in the
sequence). This condition was not made explicit in any of the analyzed textbooks. For
example, in Figure 37, students are expected to complete the sequence of products -6,-4,-2,0
with the numbers 2,4,6, yet no information is given to rule out other possibilities.
6.5.2. Extension of properties: This justification strategy is based on the assumption that
certain properties of natural numbers (e.g., the distributive law, the commutative law, and the
multiplicative property of zero) can be extended to the set of integers and be preserved.
Instances of justification involving this justification strategy involved the use of the
multiplicative property of zero and of the distributive property of multiplication over addition
(e.g., Figure 39). This justification strategy is often considered in the literature to be of
greater mathematical validity, or at least the most sophisticated, compared with the other
three kinds I found in the textbooks (e.g., Arcavi & Bruckheimer, 1981; J. C. Peterson, 1972).
73 | Justification strategies in the textbooks
Figure 39. Deduction using a specific case by Extension of properties (Textbook F, vol 2, p. 48)
6.5.3. Number-line models: This justification strategy is based on modelling signed numbers
in a way that deals both with the sign and with the absolute value of the product. Instances in
the textbooks involved either movement forward and backward in time on a number line
(Figure 40), or a change in weight over time (Figure 41).
Figure 40. Deduction using a model by Line model (adapted from Textbook A, vol 2, p. 392)
Figure 41. Deduction using a model by Line model (Textbook A, vol 2, p. 395)
Section 6.5 – Product of negatives | 74
In these models, the product a.b is modelled such that the multiplicand b represents a signed
rate of change of a certain quantity (e.g., weight or distance) and the multiplier a represents a
change in time, prior or later from a given moment. For example, the product (-4)*(-3) can be
modelled either as "Where was the ant four minutes ago, if it moved against the direction of
the arrow, and its speed is three units per minute?" (e.g., Figure 40), or as "How much did the
whale weigh four weeks ago, if it loses 3 kilograms per week?" (e.g., Figure 41).
The Paths of justification
Table 15 summarizes the frequencies of the justification strategies offered in Israeli 7th grade
mathematics textbooks for the mathematical statement the product of negatives. As can be
seen, justifications were offered in every textbook, commonly more than one instance of
justification per path. Four textbooks offered paths based on a combination of several
justification strategies, commonly including discovering patterns.
Figure 43 presents the paths of justification offered in the textbooks for this mathematical
statement. As can be seen, paths commonly opened with discovering patterns and ended with
the more formal justification strategy – extension of properties. One textbook (Textbook A)
offered a path based on four justification strategies, including Number-line models. As a
curiosity, Textbook A provided a mnemonic for the sign rule which is based on the logical
principle stating that double negation is an affirmation. The mnemonic was offered after
properly establishing the sign rule, and relied on a superficial similarity to the proverb 'the
enemy of my enemy is my friend' (see Figure 42).
Figure 42. A mnemonic relying on Double negation (Textbook A, vol 2, p. 394)
Table 15. Product of negatives – frequencies of justification strategies, by textbook
Justification strategy Textbook Total
A B C D E F G H
Discovering patterns 1 2 1 1 1 . 1 1 8
Extension of properties 1 . 1 1 1 1 . . 5
Number-line models 2 . . . . . . . 2
Total 4 2 2 2 2 1 1 1 15
75 | Justification strategies in the textbooks
Discovering patterns was associated with two types of justification. Further analysis suggests
that this is a result of two methods underlying these instances of justification – either
detecting the pattern numerically by observing a sequence of numbers, or detecting a pattern
by observing a set of results achieved by using a calculator.
In justification of the product of negatives, the Israeli school curriculum for grades 7-9
suggests one justification strategy: extension of properties (Israel Ministry of Education,
2009). As Figure 43 shows, this justification strategy was common in the textbooks (five
textbooks).
Textbook Path of justification
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
a=appeal to authority; e=experimental demonstration; m=deduction using a model;
s=deduction using a specific case.
Figure 43. Product of negatives – Paths of justification
Number-line
m
Properties
s
Patterns
e
Number-line
m
Patterns
e
Patterns
e
Patterns
e
Properties
s
Patterns
e
Properties
s
Patterns
e
Properties
s
Properties
s
Patterns
a
Patterns
e
Section 6.6 – Area of a trapezium | 76
6.6. Area of a trapezium
Two justification strategies were used in the analyzed textbooks for justifying why the area
formula for a trapezium with bases a, b and altitude h is (a + b).h/2. Both justification
strategies are addressed and reviewed in the mathematics education literature: (i) Dissection,
and (ii) Construction (e.g., Hoosain, 2010; L. L. Peterson & Saul, 1990; Usnick, Lamphere,
& Bright, 1992). Additional warrants are mentioned in the literature yet were not found in the
analyzed textbooks (e.g., relying on Pick's rule for computing the area of a simple polygon by
using the number of lattice points in its interior, see Hirsch, 1974; Hoosain, 2010). In this
section I address two aspects: (1) The justification strategies offered, in descending order of
frequency in the textbooks; and (2) The paths of justification.
The justification strategies offered
6.6.1. Dissection: This justification strategy is based on representing the area of a given
trapezium as a sum of areas of shapes, each with an area formula known to the students.
Instances of this justification strategy in the textbooks involved six variations, suggesting
various methods of dissection (e.g., Figure 44): (1) dissection into a triangle and a
parallelogram by drawing a segment parallel to one of the sides of the trapezium, (2)
dissection into two triangles by drawing a diagonal, (3) dissection into two triangles and a
rectangle by drawing two altitudes, (4) dissection into three triangles by drawing a segment
from each of the vertices of the small base to the long base, (5) dissection by drawing a
segment from a vertex of the small base to the midpoint of one of the sides of the trapezium
and rearranging the two areas to form a triangle, and (6) dissection by using a mid-segment to
dissect a trapezium into two trapeziums and rearranging the two areas to form a
parallelogram.
Figure 44. Experimental demonstration by Dissection (Textbook D, vol 2, p.184)
77 | Justification strategies in the textbooks
6.6.2. Construction: This justification strategy is based on the arrangement of several
congruent trapeziums such that they form a shape with an area formula known to the
students. Instances of this justification strategy involved construction of a parallelogram, the
area of which is represented as a sum of areas of two trapeziums (e.g., Figure 45).
Figure 45. Deduction using a general case by Construction (Textbook G, vol 3, p.93)
A common implicit assumption for this construction is that the shape created by rearranging
the congruent trapeziums is indeed a parallelogram. This assumption was not justified in any
of the analyzed textbooks, yet several teacher's guides mentioned it as a caveat. In spite of
this limitation, this construction was frequently offered in the textbooks.
The Paths of justification
Table 16 summarizes the frequencies for the justification strategies offered in Israeli 7th grade
mathematics textbooks for the mathematical statement area of a trapezium. As can be seen,
instances of justification were offered in every textbook, commonly more than four instances
per textbook. Seven textbooks offered a path based on a combination of both justification
strategies, often offering several forms of dissections in each path.
Table 16. Area of a trapezium – frequencies of justification strategies, by textbook
Justification strategy Textbook Total
A B C D E F G H
Dissection 3 4 3 6 3 4 2 3 28
Construction 3 1 2 . 1 1 2 1 11
Total 6 5 5 6 4 5 4 4 39
Section 6.6 – Area of a trapezium | 78
Figure 46 presents the paths of justification offered in the textbooks for this mathematical
statement. As can be seen, paths typically opened with several forms of dissection, followed
by construction (of a parallelogram). However, two textbooks opened by construction.
According to the teacher's guide for Textbook A, this decision was deliberate, and aimed at
helping students remember the need to divide by two as part of the calculation by using the
formula. Textbook E's teacher's guide does not provide information regarding this decision.
Further analysis of the paths of justification focused on both characteristics of each instance
of justification (i.e., justification strategy and type). The analysis revealed that several types
of justification were associated with each of the justification strategies – both empirical and
deductive types. However, construction was commonly associated with deductive types of
justification, possibly for the same didactic power mentioned in Textbook A's teacher's guide.
In justification of area of a trapezium, the Israeli school curriculum for grades 7-9 suggests
two justification strategies: dissection followed by construction of a parallelogram (Israel
Ministry of Education, 2009). As Figure 46 shows, textbooks commonly offered this sequence.
Textbook Path of justification
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
e=experimental demonstration; r=concordance of a rule with a model; s/g=deduction using a
specific/general case.
Figure 46. Area of a trapezium – Paths of justification
Construction
s
Construction
g
Construction
r
Dissection
s
Dissection
s
Dissection
s
Dissection
e
Dissection
s
Dissection
g
Construction
g
Dissection
g
Dissection
e
Dissection
s
Dissection
s
Construction
s
Construction
g
Dissection
e
Dissection
e
Dissection
e
Dissection
g
Dissection
r
Dissection
g
Construction
s
Dissection
s
Dissection
s
Dissection
r
Dissection
e
Dissection
e
Dissection
e
Dissection
g
Construction
g
Dissection
e
Construction
e
Construction
g
Dissection
e
Dissection
e
Dissection
s
Dissection
s
Construction
s
79 | Justification strategies in the textbooks
6.7. Area of a disk
One justification strategy was used in the analyzed textbooks for justifying why the area
formula for a disk with radius r is πr2. This justification strategy is addressed and reviewed in
the mathematics education literature: Dissection (e.g., Borko et al., 2000; Moore, 2013).
Additional warrants are mentioned in the literature yet were not found in the analyzed
textbooks (e.g., overlaying a grid paper on the disk, counting squares that coincide with the
disk, and estimating the magnitude of the parts of the squares that lie near the edge, see
Moore, 2013). In this section I address two aspects: (1) The justification strategies offered, in
descending order of frequency in the textbooks; and (2) The paths of justification.
The justification strategies offered
Dissection: This justification strategy is based on the method of dissection and
rearrangement. The area of a disk is represented as a sum of areas and rearranged to resemble
a shape with a known area formula (as the number of parts tends to infinity). Instances of this
justification strategy commonly involved a rearrangement of sectors to form an approximate
parallelogram (e.g., Figure 47). One textbook offered a rearrangement of "opened out"
concentric rings to form an approximate right-angled triangle (e.g., Figure 48).
Figure 47. Deduction using a general case by Dissection into sectors (Textbook G, part 3, p. 118)
Section 6.7 – Area of a disk | 80
There are two major differences between dissection of a trapezium and of a disk: (1) number
of steps, and (2) previous familiarity. First, while dissection of a trapezium is a finite process
which terminates after a small number of moves, dissection of a disk involves an infinite
number of cuts and rearrangements. This fundamental difference hints at the concept of limit,
even in an unrefined way. It is therefore less intuitive and involves a higher cognitive load.
Second, Israeli students first encounter the area formula in elementary school, without
justification. This familiarity, combined with the complexity level of the explanation, might
deter textbook authors from allocating time and resources to formulating a path of
justification with multiple types of justification.
The Paths of justification
Table 17 summarizes the frequencies for the justification strategies offered in Israeli 7th grade
mathematics textbooks for the mathematical statement area of a disk. As can be seen,
instances of justification were offered in seven textbooks, commonly only one instance per
textbook. Textbook E presented this mathematical statement as a reminder, and did not offer
any justification or explanation. The textbooks offered a path based on one justification
strategy. Textbook F offered three instances of this justification strategy, including both
variants (i.e., dissection into sectors and into concentric circles).
Figure 48. Deduction using a general case by Dissection into rings (Textbook F, vol 2, p. 223)
81 | Justification strategies in the textbooks
Figure 49 presents the paths of justification offered in the textbooks for this mathematical
statement. As can be seen, one justification strategy was offered in the textbooks. Further
analysis of the paths of justification focused on both characteristics of each instance of
justification (i.e., justification strategy and type). This analysis reveals that as a rule,
dissection was associated with one type of justification – deduction using a general case.
This almost absolute correlation is very different from the diverse assortment of types of
justification that was associated with dissection in the case of the area of a trapezium, and
might stem from the inherent differences discussed above.
In justification of the area of a disk, the Israeli school curriculum for grades 7-9 suggests one
justification strategy: dissection (Israel Ministry of Education, 2009). As Figure 49 shows, this
justification strategy was found in seven textbooks.
Textbook Path of justification
A
B
C
D
E –
F
G
H
e=experimental demonstration; g=deduction using a general case.
Figure 49. Area of a disk – Paths of justification
Table 17. Area of a disk – frequencies of justification strategies, by textbook
Justification strategy Textbook Total
A B C D E F G H
Dissection 1 1 1 1 . 2 1 1 8
Total 1 1 1 1 0 2 1 1 8
Dissection
g
Dissection
g
Dissection
g
Dissection
g
Dissection
g
Dissection
g
Dissection
g
Dissection
g
Section 6.8 – Vertical angles | 82
6.8. Vertical angles
Two justification strategies were used in the analyzed textbooks for justifying why vertically
opposite angles are congruent. Both justification strategies are addressed and reviewed in the
mathematics education literature: (i) Supplementary angles (Host, Baynham, & McMaster,
2015; Reid, 1997), and (ii) Measurement (J. C. Chen, 2006; Host et al., 2015; Howard, 1919).
Additional warrants are mentioned in the literature yet were not found in the analyzed
textbooks (e.g., by using other means to compare the measures of the angles, such as paper
folding or dynamic geometry software, see C. L. Chen & Herbst, 2013; Olson, 1975). In this
section I address two aspects: (1) The justification strategies offered, in descending order of
frequency in the textbooks; and (2) The paths of justification.
The justification strategies offered
6.8.1. Supplementary angles: This justification strategy is based on the fact that angles on a
straight line add up to a straight angle. Given two vertically opposite angles, a third angle is
identified as an angle that supplements each of the angles. It follows that the two vertically
opposite angles are congruent (e.g., Figure 50).
Figure 50. Deduction using a general case by Supplementary angles (Textbook F, vol 3, p. 136)
83 | Justification strategies in the textbooks
6.8.2. Measurement: This justification strategy is based on the fact that angles with the same
measure are congruent. Instances of this justification strategy in the textbooks involved direct
comparison of two vertically opposite angles, in one or more special cases, by using a
protractor (e.g., Figure 51).
The Paths of justification
Table 18 summarizes the frequencies for the justification strategies offered in Israeli 7th grade
mathematics textbooks for the mathematical statement vertical angles. As can be seen,
instances of justification were offered in every textbook, commonly two instances per
textbook. Three textbooks offered a path based on a combination of both justification
strategies.
Figure 51. Experimental demonstration by Measurement (Textbook F, vol 3, p. 136)
Table 18. Vertical angles – frequencies of justification strategies, by textbook
Justification strategy Textbook Total
A B C D E F G H
Supplementary angles 1 2 2 1 2 1 1 2 12
Measurement 2 . . . . 1 1 . 4
Total 3 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 16
Section 6.8 – Vertical angles | 84
Figure 52 presents the paths of justification offered in the textbooks for this mathematical
statement. As can be seen, measurement always preceded supplementary angles. Five
textbooks offered only one strategy, relying on supplementary angles.
Further analysis of the paths of justification, focused on both characteristics of each instance
of justification (i.e., justification strategy and type), reveals that supplementary angles was
associated with two types of justification – deduction using a specific case, deduction using a
general case. Three types of paths leading to deduction using a general case were found in
the textbooks: (1) immediately following deduction using a specific case, (2) immediately
following an experimental demonstration relying on measurement, and (3) on its own.
In justification of vertical angles, the Israeli school curriculum for grades 7-9 suggests one
justification strategy: measurement followed by supplementary angles (Israel Ministry of
Education, 2009). As Figure 52 shows, this sequence was offered in three textbooks, and most
books relied only on supplementary angles.
Textbook Path of justification
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
e=experimental demonstration; s/g=deduction using a specific/general case.
Figure 52. Vertical angles – Paths of justification
Measurement
e
Measurement
e
Supplementar
g
Supplementar
s
Supplementar
g
Supplementar
s
Supplementar
g
Supplementar
g
Supplementar
s
Supplementar
g
Measurement
e
Supplementar
g
Measurement
e
Supplementar
s
Supplementar
s
Supplementar
g
85 | Justification strategies in the textbooks
6.9. Corresponding angles
Two justification strategies were used in the analyzed textbooks for justifying why the
corresponding angles between parallel lines are equal. Both justification strategies are
addressed and reviewed in the mathematics education literature: (i) Measurement (C. L. Chen
& Herbst, 2013; Weaver & Quinn, 1999), and (ii) Alternate angles. Additional warrants are
mentioned in the literature yet were not found in the analyzed textbooks (e.g., relying on
paper folding to demonstrate the congruence of the corresponding angles, see Olson, 1975).
In this section I address two aspects: (1) The justification strategies offered, in descending
order of frequency in the textbooks; and (2) The paths of justification.
The justification strategies offered
6.9.1. Measurement: This justification strategy is based on direct comparison of the
corresponding angles by using a measuring tool. Instances of this justification strategy
involved several measuring tools, either physical (e.g., a protractor or a transparent sheet, see
Figure 53), or a dynamic geometry software (e.g., Figure 54).
Figure 53. Experimental demonstration by Measurement (Textbook G, vol 2, p. 182)
Section 6.9 – Corresponding angles | 86
Figure 54. Experimental demonstration by Measurement (adapted from Textbook C, vol 2, p. 189)
6.9.2. Alternate angles: This justification strategy is based on two theorems – the Alternate
Interior Angle Theorem (i.e., Alternate angles between parallels are congruent) and the
Vertical Angles Theorem. Given two parallel lines and a transversal, two corresponding
angles can be shown to be congruent to a third angle by using these theorems in either order.
It follows that the corresponding angles are congruent to each other (e.g., Figure 55).
Figure 55. Deduction using a specific case by Alternate angles (Textbook H, vol 2, p. 231)
Instances of this justification strategy in the textbooks involved a specific order of
presentation of topics – the congruence of alternate angles between parallel lines must be
established beforehand, in order to serve as a warrant for the congruence of the corresponding
angles.
87 | Justification strategies in the textbooks
The Paths of justification
Table 19 summarizes the frequencies for the justification strategies offered in Israeli 7th grade
mathematics textbooks for the mathematical statement corresponding angles. Instances of
justification were offered in every textbook, typically more than one instance per textbook.
Two textbooks offered a path based on a combination of both justification strategies. Five
textbooks offered only one strategy, commonly relying on measurement.
Figure 56 presents the paths of justification offered in the textbooks for this mathematical
statement. As can be seen, paths that included alternate angles typically opened with it, and
offered measurement as an affirmation of the result.
In justification of corresponding angles, the Israeli school curriculum for grades 7-9 suggests
two justification strategies: measurement followed by alternate angles (Israel Ministry of
Education, 2009). The Israeli curriculum suggests beginning by justifying the congruence of
alternate angles between parallel lines by using measurement and paper folding, and only
then to rely on this congruence in order to deduce the congruence of corresponding angles
between parallel lines. As Figure 56 shows, this sequence was offered in three textbooks, and
most books relied only on measurement.
Table 19. Corresponding angles – frequencies of justification strategies, by textbook
Justification strategy Textbook Total
A B C D E F G H
Measurement 1 1 1 2 . 1 2 1 9
Alternate angles 2 . . . 1 . . 1 4
Total 3 1 1 2 1 1 2 2 13
Section 6.9 – Corresponding angles | 88
Textbook Path of justification
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
e=experimental demonstration; s/g=deduction using a specific/general case.
Figure 56. Corresponding angles – Paths of justification
Measurement
e
Altern. Angles
g
Altern. Angles
g
Measurement
e
Measurement
e
Measurement
e
Measurement
e
Altern. Angles
s
Measurement
e
Measurement
e
Measurement
e
Altern. Angles
s
Measurement
e
89 | Justification strategies in the textbooks
6.10. Angle sum of a triangle
Five justification strategies were used in the analyzed textbooks for justifying why the angle
sum of a triangle is 180o. All five justification strategies are addressed and reviewed in the
mathematics education literature: (i) Parallel line (Chazan, 1993; Knuth, 2002; Reiss &
Renkl, 2002; Tall et al., 2012); (ii) Angle rearrangement (Knuth, 2002; Olson, 1975; Reiss &
Renkl, 2002; Tall et al., 2012); (iii) Measurement (Reiss & Renkl, 2002; Tall et al., 2012;
Weaver & Quinn, 1999); (iv) Right triangle (Harel & Sowder, 1998; Knuth, 2002); and (v)
Parallel line and extension (Tall et al., 2012). Additional warrants are mentioned in the
literature yet were not found in the analyzed textbooks (e.g., by arranging congruent triangles
such that they tile a plane, see Reiss & Renkl, 2002). In this section I address two aspects: (1)
The justification strategies offered, in descending order of frequency in the textbooks; and (2)
The paths of justification.
The justification strategies offered
6.10.1. Parallel line: This justification strategy is based on the Alternate Interior Angle
theorem. An auxiliary line, parallel to one of the sides of the triangle, is drawn through the
opposite vertex. The AIA theorem is then applied twice, to find three angles that form a
straight line and thus their sum is 180o (e.g., Figure 57).
Figure 57. Deduction using a general case by Parallel line (Textbook C, vol 3, p. 173)
6.10.2. Angle rearrangement: This justification strategy is based on a physical experiment.
The interior angles of the triangle are rearranged to show that they form a straight line.
Instances of this justification strategy involved either folding a triangle cut out of paper (e.g.,
Figure 58) or tearing it (e.g., Figure 59).
Section 6.10 – Angle sum of a triangle | 90
Figure 58. Experimental demonstration by Angle rearrangement (Textbook B, vol 3, p. 161)
Figure 59. Experimental demonstration by Angle rearrangement (Textbook B, vol 3, p. 161)
6.10.3. Right triangle: This justification strategy is based on properties of right triangles.
Instances of this justification strategy involved relying either on a previously established fact
regarding the sum of the two acute angles of a right triangle (e.g., Figure 60) or on the
property of a rectangle as a quadrilateral with four right angles (e.g., Figure 61).
Figure 60. Deduction using a general case by Right triangle (Textbook D, vol 3, p. 135)
91 | Justification strategies in the textbooks
Figure 61. Deduction using a general case by Right triangle (Textbook A, vol 3, p. 647)
6.10.4. Measurement: This justification strategy is based on a practical measurement. The
angles of a triangle are measured to check that their sum is equal to 180o. Instances of this
justification strategy involved using either a protractor (e.g., Figure 62) or dynamic geometry
software (e.g., Figure 63).
Figure 62. Experimental demonstration by Measurement (Textbook H, vol 3, p. 167)
Figure 63. Experimental demonstration by Measurement (adapted from Textbook H, vol 3, p. 167)
Section 6.10 – Angle sum of a triangle | 92
6.10.5. Parallel line and extension: This justification strategy is based on relying both on the
Alternate Interior Angle theorem and the Corresponding Angles theorem. An auxiliary line,
parallel to one of the sides of the triangle, is drawn through the opposite vertex, and a ray
extends another side of the triangle. The AIA and CA theorems are then applied once each, to
get three angles that form a straight line and thus their sum is 180o (e.g., Figure 64)
Figure 64. Deduction using a general case by Parallel line & extension (Textbook A, vol 3, p. 621)
The Paths of justification
Table 20 summarizes the frequencies of the justification strategies offered in Israeli 7th grade
mathematics textbooks for the mathematical statement angle sum of a triangle. As can be
seen, justifications were offered in every textbook, commonly more than two instances of
justification per path. All eight textbooks offered a path based on a combination of several
justification strategies, usually parallel line and angle rearrangement.
Figure 65 presents the paths of justification offered in the textbooks for this mathematical
statement. As can be seen, paths typically opened with a concrete demonstration, either by
angle rearrangement or by measurement. Paths that included both strategies opened with the
more familiar measurement. Following the concrete justification, more abstract justification
strategies were offered, typically relying on parallel line. Four textbooks offered an
additional strategy, relying on properties of right triangle.
Table 20. Angle sum of a triangle – frequencies of justification strategies, by textbook
Justification strategy Textbook Total
A B C D E F G H
Parallel line 1 1 2 1 2 1 1 . 9
Angle rearrangement 1 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 9
Right triangle 1 1 . 1 . 1 . . 4
Measurement . 1 . . . 1 . 1 3
Parallel line and extension 1 . . . . . . . 1
Total 4 5 3 3 3 4 2 2 26
93 | Justification strategies in the textbooks
In justification of the angle sum of a triangle, the Israeli school curriculum for grades 7-9
suggests two justification strategy: angle rearrangement followed by parallel line (Israel
Ministry of Education, 2009). As Figure 65 shows, this sequence was offered in five
textbooks.
Textbook Path of justification
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
e=experimental demonstration; s/g=deduction using a specific/general case.
Figure 65. Angle sum of a triangle – Paths of justification
Rearranging
e
Parallel line
g
Parallel&ext
g
Rt. triangle
g
Measuring
e
Rearranging
e
Rearranging
e
Parallel line
g
Rt. triangle
g
Rearranging
e
Parallel line
s
Parallel line
g
Rearranging
e
Rt. triangle
g
Parallel line
g
Rearranging
e
Parallel line
s
Parallel line
g
Measuring
e
Rearranging
e
Rt. triangle
g
Parallel line
g
Rearranging
e
Parallel line
s
Measuring
e
Rearranging
e
Section 6.11 – Summary | 94
6.11. Summary
Analysis of the paths of justification focused on three attributes: (1) characteristics – the
justification strategies in each path; (2) sequencing – the order in which justification
strategies were offered in the textbook, and (3) the ways in which the specific characteristics
(i.e., justification strategy) relate to the meta-level characteristics (i.e., justification type).
Table 21 presents the number of justification strategies per path of justification, by
mathematical statement and textbook. A total of 26 distinct justification strategies were
offered in the textbooks for the 10 analysed statements, commonly two or more per statement
across the textbooks. Half of the paths included more than one strategy (42 of 80). Most
textbooks (all but Textbook A) offered a similar number of strategies, regardless of the scope
of the textbook (i.e., limited or standard/expanded scope). Additionally, a similar number of
strategies were offered in algebra and in geometry.
Table 21. Number of justification strategies per path, by statement and textbook.
Mathematical statement Textbook Total
A
B
2.3
B
2.17
2
C D E F G H Distinct
Equivalent expressions 3 2 2 2 3 2 2 2 3
Division by zero 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2
Distributive law 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 2
Equivalent equations 2 1 1 1 2 2 1 1 4
Product of negatives 3 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 3
Area of a trapezium 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2
Area of a disk 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 1 1
Vertical angles 2 1 1 1 1 2 2 1 2
Corresponding angles 2 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 2
Angle sum of a triangle 4 4 2 3 2 4 2 2 5
Total 23 16 14 15 16 18 15 14 26
Out of the 26 justification strategies identified in the textbooks, 23 were used more than once
for a specific statement across the textbooks. Table 22 presents the frequencies of types of
justification in the textbooks, by justification strategy. As can be seen, justification strategies
often corresponded to a single type of justification (70%, 16 of 23). For certain justification
strategies, as many as 16 instances of justification all involved a single type of justification.
For example, in justification of the area of a disk, 8 instances of justification relied on
dissection, and all eight involved a single type of justification – deduction using a general
case. This suggests the existence of a one-sided dependency between the two characteristics
of instances of justification.
95 | Justification strategies in the textbooks
Table 22. Frequencies of justification strategies, by justification types
Justification strategy Justification type Total
a q r e m s g
Equivalent expressions
Rules and conventions . . . . . 10 . 10
Substitution . . . 6 . . . 6
Description equivalence . . . . 4 . . 4
Division by zero
Inverse of multiplication . . . . . 16 . 16
Repeated subtraction . . . . 1 . . 1
Distributive law
Area / array . . . . 9 . . 9
Arithmetic conventions . . 8 . . . . 8
Equivalent equations
Balance model . . . . 5 . . 5
Undoing . . . 3 . . . 3
Intuitive comparison . . 1 2 . . . 3
Segment model . . . . 1 . . 1
Product of negatives
Discovering patterns 1 . . 7 . . . 8
Extension of properties . . . . . 5 . 5
Number-line models . . . . 2 . . 2
Area of a trapezium
Dissection . . 2 11 . 10 5 28
Construction . . 1 1 . 4 5 11
Area of a disk
Dissection . . . . . . 9 8
Vertical angles
Supplementary angles . . . . . 5 7 12
Measurement . . . 1 . . . 4
Corresponding angles
Measurement . . . 9 . . . 9
Alternate angles . . . . . 2 2 4
Angle sum of a triangle
Parallel line . . . . . 3 6 9
Angle rearrangement . . . 4 . . . 9
Right triangle . . . . . . 4 4
Measurement . . . 3 . . . 3
Parallel line and extension . . . . . . 1 1
a=appeal to authority; q=qualitative analogy; r=concordance of a rule with a model;
e=experimental demonstration; m/s/g=deduction using a model/ specific case/general case.
Section 6.11 – Summary | 96
Further analysis focused on the mathematical topic – algebra and geometry. Again, analysis
focused on mathematical means that were used more than once for each statement across the
textbooks. This analysis reveals that the association between the two characteristics was
much stronger for algebra statements (83%, 10 of 12) compared with geometry statements
(55%, 6 of 11). In other words, paths of justification in geometry offered a greater number of
justification strategies which were associated with multiple types of justification. Analysis of
these paths revealed two distinct patterns. First, for justification strategies that involved both
empirical and deductive types, the empirical preceded the deductive types (2 of 2). Second,
strategies that involved two deductive types of justification were offered in a particular
sequence: deduction using a specific case followed by deduction using a general case (5 of 5).
For each mathematical statement I analyzed the paths of justification for sequences of
justification strategies (i.e., all combinations of one or more justification strategies offered
sequentially in each path). Figure 66 presents the most common segment of justification
strategies for each statement across the textbooks, the textbooks that offer that segment, and
the sequence suggested in the Israeli school curriculum for grades 7-9 (Israel Ministry of
Education, 2009). As can be seen, for most statements (8 of 10), at least five textbooks
offered similar sequences of justification strategies. Moreover, for most statements (8 of 10),
the segments were very similar to the sequences suggested in the Israeli curriculum – either
identical or included in these sequences. For two statements, two segments were equally
common in the textbooks, and the longer segment is illustrated here. Segments of three or
more justification strategies were very rarely found in more than one path (only once, for
angle sum of a triangle).
Further analysis of the sequences of justification strategies focused on the associated types of
justification. This analysis suggests that the order in which justification strategies were
offered in the analyzed textbooks might be directly related to the sequences of justification
types. As described in Section 5.4, Experimental demonstration almost always preceded
deductive type(s), and Deduction using a specific case always preceded Deduction using a
general case. Similarly, paths of justification commonly offered justification strategies
associated with experimentation were before strategies associated with deduction using either
a generic example or a general case. Figure 66 exemplifies this tendency for the most common
segments of these sequences.
97 | Justification strategies in the textbooks
Statement Most common segment (Textbooks) Israeli curriculum
Equivalent expressions
(A,B,D,E,F,G)
Division by zero
(B,C,D,E,F,G,H)
Distributive law
(A,B,D,E,F,G)
Equivalent equations
(C,H)*
Product of negatives
(C,D,E)*
Area of a trapezium
(B,C,F,G,H)
Area of a disk
(A,B,C,D,F,G,H)
Vertical angles
(B,C,D,E,H)
Corresponding angle
(B,C,D,F,G)
Angle sum of a triangle
(A,B,C,E,G)
(*) indicates that two segments were equally common in the textbooks for that statement.
Figure 66. Common sequences of justification strategies in the textbooks and the Israeli curriculum
Substitution
e
Conventions
s
Conventions
Inverse a:0 s
Inverse a:0
Inverse 0:0
Area/Array
m
Conventions
r
Area/Array
Conventions
Balance
m
Balance
Patterns
e
Properties
s
Properties
Dissection
e/s/g
Construction
e/s/g
Dissection
Construction
Dissection
g
Dissection
Supplementar
s/g
Measurement
Supplementar
Measurement
e
Measurement
Altern. Angles
Rearranging
e
Parallel line
g
Rearranging
Parallel line
Paths of justification in Lena's classes – background | 98
7. Paths of justification in Lena's classes
In this chapter I examine the ways in which the textbook, together with the teacher and the
students, shape the opportunities offered for students to learn to explain and justify. The
current chapter focuses on findings for one case study: Lena and her classes. Chapter 8 deals
with Millie and her classes.
Lena received a B.Ed. from a teachers' college, and majored in mathematics. She had five
years of experience teaching mathematics, all at the junior-high school level. However, the
year of data collection was Lena's first year teaching at that school.
There were two 7th grade classes in the school, and Lena taught both: Class L1 with 29
students and Class L2 with 24. Observations suggest that the student ability level in both
classes was diverse, and there were frequent disciplinary issues. Once a week, a
supplementary teacher aided Lena during geometry lessons by taking twelve advanced
students out of the classroom and teaching them in parallel. The lessons given by the
supplementary teacher were not documented due to research constraints.
The year of data collection was the first year Lena had used Textbook C. In the concluding
teacher interview Lena conveyed that she planned her lessons by reviewing Textbook C and
its teacher's guide. However, she revealed that she thought the textbook was unsuitable at
times for students with low achievements. Indeed, Lena occasionally used other textbooks as
a source of introductory exercises and activities.
Observations in Lena's classes were made for five mathematical statements, one in algebra
and four in geometry: Equivalent equations, Area of a trapezium, Area of a disk, Vertical
angles, and Angle sum of a triangle. For each statement, lessons in both classes took place on
the same day – the lesson in Class L2 was immediately followed by a lesson in Class L1.
This chapter comprises six sections. The first five sections deal with the paths of justification
in the observed classrooms for each statement. Each section begins with lesson graphs which
provide a general outline of the observed lessons in each class. The graphs describe the main
sections of the observed lesson, along with a graphic representation of the duration of each
section in each class. The graphs are followed by a description of the paths of justification in
the textbook and in the classes. The sixth and final section summarizes the case study.
99 | Paths of justification in Lena's classes
7.1. Equivalent equations
7.1.1. Lesson graphs
Class L1 Class L2 Activity (student grouping)
14 minutes
8 minutes
Administration
Non-academic activities (e.g., management, announcements, discipline)
30 minutes
20 minutes
Equation solving (Whole class)
Lesson goal – revisiting equations, an emphasis on understanding.
Launching task (see Figure 68) – finding the weight of a ball on a
balanced scale. Lena discusses the relation between operations on the
scale and operations on a corresponding equation.
Reading a general-knowledge textbook segment about balance scales.
36 minutes
59 minutes
Equation solving (Individual student work)
Students work on textbook tasks: solving equations with and without
the balance model, and attending to the limitations of the model.
After 20-25 minutes of student work, Lena sits with two-three students,
brings a physical model of a balance scale, and uses it to explain the
relation between operations on it and equations. During that time the
rest of the students keep working.
80 minutes 87 minutes
7.1.2. The paths of justification
Figure 67 presents the paths of justification for the statement Performing valid operations on
both sides of an equation yields an equivalent equation, by class and textbook. Each step
represents a single instance of justification by order of appearance in the textbook/classroom
lesson, and both the justification strategy and type are presented.
Statement Class L1 Class L2 Textbook C
Equivalent
equations
m =deduction using a model.
Figure 67. Paths of justification in Lena's classes for Equivalent equations
Balance
m
Balance
m
Balance
m
Section 7.1 – Equivalent equations | 100
7.1.2.1. The path of justification in the textbook
The path of justification in Textbook C comprised one instance of justification. The textbook
began by discussing several intuitive methods for solving equations (e.g., cover-up). One
such method was introduced as performing operations on both sides of an equation, yet
without justification. In the following volume of the textbook, several chapters later, the
subject of equation solving was addressed again. The mathematical statement was justified by
using a Balance model (i.e., modelling an equation as two sides of a balance scale) in a
deduction using a model. The textbook discussed the relationship between operations on the
model and on the original equation (see Figure 68), as well as certain limitations of the model
(e.g., not every equation can be modelled as a balance scale, see Figure 69).
Figure 68. Balance model (Textbook C, vol 3, p. 54)
Figure 69. Balance model – limitations (Textbook C, vol 3, p. 58)
101 | Paths of justification in Lena's classes
7.1.2.2. The paths of justification in the classrooms
The paths of justification in Lena's classes were very similar to the textbook path and to each
other. In both classes, the paths included one instance of justification, relying on balance
model in a deduction using a model (see Figure 70 (a) and (b)). Lena solved a textbook task
that involved finding the weight of a ball on a balanced scale by performing operations on a
balance model. Then, she made connected between operations on the model and operations
on an equation (e.g., subtracting a number from both sides of an equation is modelled as
removing that number of weights from both sides of the scale).
This connection was exemplified differently in each class. In Class L2 Lena mentioned the
corresponding equation, whereas later that day in Class L1, Lena explicitly wrote down that
equation and solved it (see Figure 70 (a)). This difference appears to be didactical in nature
and might stem from the experience Lena gained between lessons.
(a) (b) Figure 70. Balance model (screenshots in Class L1 [a] and Class L2 [b])
In both classes, the flow of the lesson was interrupted frequently in order to discipline the
students. These interruptions cut short several conversations between Lena and her students,
some of them pertaining to the justification of the mathematical statement.
Section 7.2 – Area of a trapezium | 102
7.2. Area of a trapezium
7.2.1. Lesson graphs
Class L1 Class L2 Activity (student grouping)
9 minutes
9 minutes
Administration
Non-academic activities (e.g., management, announcements, discipline)
6 minutes
5 minutes
Recap and Defining a trapezium (Whole class)
Lesson goal – finding the area of a trapezium by using known area
formulae.
Recap of the area formulae for rectangle, square, triangle, and
parallelogram.
Defining a trapezium as a quadrilateral with two parallel sides.
–
3 minutes
Trapezium dissections (Whole class)
In L2: Lena asks for ways to dissect a trapezium into the known shapes.
Several options are suggested [ , , , ], and Lena discusses
the potential efficiency of the dissections.
10 minutes
10 minutes
Calculating the area of a trapezium numerically (Whole class)
Lena sketches a trapezium dissected into a rectangle and two triangles,
and provides the measures for each segment. Lena instructs the class to
calculate the area of each part separately and add them together.
21 minutes
23 minutes
Calculating the area of a trapezium (Individual student work)
Students work on textbook tasks: calculating the area of a trapezium by
using known area formulae, and identifying trapezia by their definition.
9 minutes
11 minutes
Justifying the area formula for a trapezium (Whole class)
In L2: Lena relies on the intermediate results achieved earlier by the
students and begins89 min a process of rearranging these results in order
to derive the area formula. However, this process is not completed, and
instead Lena writes the general area formula.
In both classes: Lena then draws a diagonal to dissect a given trapezium
into two triangles, and obtains the general area formula: altitude*(short
base + long base)/2.
26 minutes
28 minutes
Calculating the area of a trapezium (Individual student work)
Students continue working on textbook tasks by using the area formula.
81 minutes 89 minutes
103 | Paths of justification in Lena's classes
7.2.2. The paths of justification
Figure 71 presents the paths of justification for the statement The area formula for a
trapezium with bases a, b and altitude h is (a + b)*h/2, by class and textbook.
Statement Class L1 Class L2 Textbook C
Area of a
trapezium
e=experimental demonstration; r=concordance of a rule with a model; s/g =deduction using
a specific case/ a general case; D=Dissection, C=Construction.
Figure 71. Paths of justification in Lena's classes for Area of a trapezium
7.2.2.1. The path of justification in the textbook
The path of justification in Textbook C comprised five instances of justification. Two
justification strategies were offered: dissection (i.e., the area is represented as a sum of areas
of shapes with known area formulae), followed by construction (i.e., arranging congruent
trapeziums to form a shape with a known area formula).
Dissection involved a transition from an empirical type of justification (experimental
demonstration, see Figure 72) to a deductive type (deduction using a specific case, see Figure
73). Construction involved a transition from a special case (deduction using a specific case,
see Figure 73) to the general (deduction using a general case, see Figure 74).
Figure 72. Dissection (Textbook C, vol 2, p. 112)
Figure 73. Dissection and Construction (Textbook C, vol 2, p. 112)
D s
C s
D s
D s
D e
D s
D r
C s
D s
D s
D e
C g
C s
D s
D s
D e
Section 7.2 – Area of a trapezium | 104
Figure 74. Deduction using a general case (Textbook C, vol 2, p. 112)
7.2.2.2. The paths of justification in the classrooms
The paths of justification in Lena's classes were very similar to the textbook path. Lena
started with experimental demonstration by dissection both in Class L1 (see Figure 75(a)) and
in Class L2 (see Figure 75(b)). Lena dissected a trapezium ABCD with given measures into a
rectangle ABEH and two right triangles – ADH and BCE, and instructed the students to find
the area of each shape and add them together.
(a) (b) Figure 75. Dissection (screenshots in Class L1 [a] and Class L2 [b])
Then Lena instructed the students to work individually on two textbook tasks. These tasks
offered four additional instances of justification – one relying on experimental demonstration
(see Figure 72) and three relying on deduction using a specific case (see Figure 73). The
students reported experiencing difficulties during this task.
Following the individual student work, Lena stated their goal of finding an area formula
instead of dissecting it each time. In both classes, Lena began a process of dissection by
deduction using a specific case. However, in Class L2 Lena altered the type of justification
mid-process.
105 | Paths of justification in Lena's classes
The deductive process that began in Class L2 can be described in four steps (see Figure 76):
(1) Dissecting Trapezium ABCD into a rectangle ABEH and two right triangles – ADH and
BCE, (2) Finding the area of each shape, (3) rewriting the sum of areas in order to have a
single denominator, and (4) rewriting the sum by identifying the lengths of each base. The
third step requires careful arithmetic manipulation – multiplying and dividing the area of the
rectangle by the same number.
1 2 3 43 10 10 2 4 15 10 43 4 2 4
10 42 2 2 2ABCD ADH ABEH BCES S S S
Figure 76. Derivation of the area formula of a trapezium in a specific case
In Class L2, Lena relied on the intermediate results achieved earlier by the students (see
Figure 75(b)) for the first two steps of the process. She began the third step (see Figure 77(a)),
but stopped it following numerous interjections from the students (e.g., suggestions, many of
which incorrect). Instead, she declared they were going to "sum it up", and dictated the area
formula for a trapezium (see Figure 77(b)). Finally, Lena verified the formula by showing a
correspondence between two results – the result achieved by using the rule and the result
achieved earlier by the students (Figure 78).
(a) (b) Figure 77. The deductive process in Class L2 [a], replaced by giving the rule [b]
Section 7.2 – Area of a trapezium | 106
Figure 78. Concordance of a rule with a model (screenshot in Class L2)
Then, Lena emphasized that the students were required to remember only the area formula,
and not a specific method of dissection. To strengthen her point, Lena dissected the trapezium
into two triangles by drawing a diagonal. The deduction process can be described in three
steps (see Figure 79): (1) Dissecting Trapezium ABCD into two triangles – ABC and ACD,
(2) Finding the area of each shape, (3) rewriting the sum to have a single denominator.
Here the arithmetic manipulation is much simpler, yet finding the area of triangle ABC might
be a demanding task for students due to need to extend one side and draw an exterior altitude.
As Lena commented in Class L2: "By the way, in this dissection we can see better, so I will
do it for you so it will be better for you". Lena followed the three steps of the deductive
process mentioned above and completed this justification, both in Class L1 (see Figure 80(a))
and in Class L2 (see Figure 80(b)).
1 2 3 15 10 410 4 15 4
2 2 2ABCD ABC ACDS S S
Figure 79. Derivation of the area formula of a trapezium in a specific case
107 | Paths of justification in Lena's classes
(a) (b) Figure 80. Deduction using a specific case (screenshots in Class L1 [a] and Class L2 [b])
The differences between the two lessons are likely a result of the experience Lena gained by
teaching in Class L2. It is not likely that these differences stem from time constraints,
because in both classes, approximately 50 minutes were allotted to student work following
the derivation of the area formula as a whole class activity.
Section 7.3 – Vertical angles | 108
7.3. Vertical angles
7.3.1. Lesson graphs
Class L1 Class L2 Activity (student grouping)
6 minutes
3 minutes
Administration
Non-academic activities (e.g., management, announcements, discipline)
7 minutes
6 minutes
Defining supplementary angles (Whole class)
Lena defines supplementary angles as a pair of angles whose sum is
180o.
Lena draws a line and the students identify two straight angles. Lena
adds an additional line and the students identify four pairs of
supplementary angles.
10 minutes
9 minutes
Defining vertical angles + phrasing the rule (Whole class)
Lena directs attention to a pair of vertical angles, names them, and asks
what can be said about the magnitude of vertically opposite angles.
In L1: several students reply that they are equal and Lena approves.
In L2: Lena says they are equal.
Lena writes the rule, provides a numerical example, and defines
vertical angles: 'a pair of angles with a common vertex that are not
supplementary angles'.
39 minutes
65 minutes
Naming and calculating angles (Individual student work)
Students work on textbook tasks: identifying vertical and
supplementary angles, and using the rule to calculate angle measures.
Students work on tasks from photocopied from a different textbook
(Textbook B): naming angles by three letters.
3 minutes
–
Naming angles (Whole class)
In L1: Due to student difficulties, Lena interrupts the individual work
for a short review on naming an angle by using three letters.
17 minutes
Naming and calculating angles (Individual student work)
Students continue working on tasks photocopied from Textbook B:
naming angles by using three letters.
82 minutes 83 minutes
109 | Paths of justification in Lena's classes
7.3.2. The paths of justification
Figure 81 presents the paths of justification for the statement Vertically opposite angles are
congruent, by class and textbook.
Statement Class L1 Class L2 Textbook C
Vertical
angles
– –
s/g =deduction using a specific case/ a general case.
Figure 81. Paths of justification in Lena's classes for Vertical angles
7.3.2.1. The path of justification in the textbook
The path of justification in Textbook C comprised two instances of justification. Both relied
on the same justification strategy: supplementary angles (i.e., a third angle is identified as an
angle that supplements each of the vertically opposite angles). Additionally, both instances
relied on deductive types of justification: First by deduction using a specific case (see Figure
82) and then by deduction using a general case (see Figure 83).
Figure 82. Vertical angles – deduction using a specific case (Textbook C, vol 2, p. 184)
Figure 83. Vertical angles – deduction using a general case (Textbook C, vol 2, p. 184)
Supplementary
s
Supplementary
g
Section 7.3 – Vertical angles | 110
7.3.2.2. The paths of justification in the classrooms
Lena presented the rule but did not offer any instances of justification in either class.
In each class, Lena started by drawing a pair of intersecting lines and instructed the students
to identify pairs of supplementary angles and vertically opposite angles. Then Lena inquired
whether any student knew what property these angles have. After a student gave the correct
answer, Lena confirmed and dictated the rule. For example, in Class L1:
Lena: [points at angles 2 and 4, see Figure 84] what can you say about their magnitude?
Student: They are obtuse.
Lena: […] other than their being obtuse, what else?
Same student: They are equal.
Lena: They are equal, well done
Figure 84. Vertical angles (screenshot in Class L1)
Classroom observations reveal that justification was neither requested nor given in Lena's
classes, either by Lena or by the students. After stating the rule, Lena instructed the students
to solve a textbook task by using the rule (see Figure 82). However, Lena expressed a
different approach to the need for justification for this statement in the concluding interview.
As part of the interview, Lena was shown a set of three paths of justification for this
mathematical statement (see Figure 85). In this set, one teacher offers a path similar to the
path offered in Textbook C (i.e., a generic example, followed by derivation in the general
case, and then followed by a statement of the rule), a second teacher offers the same path but
in reverse-order, and a third teacher offers a path that is based on a direct comparison of the
vertically opposite angles by using a protractor.
111 | Paths of justification in Lena's classes
Figure 85. A set of paths of justification for vertical angles (interview item).
Lena described each path as a variation she had used in the past in her classes, based on the
level of achievements of her students – either low (Teacher B), intermediate (Teacher A), or
high (Teacher C). Moreover, Lena expressed her disdain for Teacher B for stating the rule
without justifying it:
"I have taught these three explanations [i.e., paths of justification] before, depending on the
class. First of all, Teacher B – I give that to the weakest students. I come, give them the rule,
and prove it for them. Giving it as, as a proof. […] I don't like Teacher B, coming and saying
'okay, this is the rule, learn it by heart and that is all there is', because they [the students] don't
remember much [that way]."
Section 7.4 – Angle sum of a triangle | 112
7.4. Angle sum of a triangle
7.4.1. Lesson graphs
Class L1 Class L2 Activity (student grouping)
4 minutes
8 minutes
Administration
Non-academic activities (e.g., management, announcements, discipline)
9 minutes
10 minutes
The angle sum of a triangle (Whole class)
Lena describes a process in which a triangle is dissected and its angles
are rearranged (see Figure 87).
In L1: Lena asks what the outcome of the process is and students
suggest various options. When a student suggests that the angles form a
straight angle, Lena approves and states that this is the proof.
In L2: Lena reveals that the angles form a straight angle, and states that
this is the proof they need to remember.
Students solve a textbook task involving calculating the third angle of a
triangle (see Figure 88). Lena asks for two justifications – by using the
rule and by using alternate angles, and regards them as equivalent.
Lena dictates the rule: ‘the angle sum in a triangle is 180’.
64 minutes
65 minutes
The angle sum of a triangle (Individual student work)
Students work on textbook tasks: calculating angles in triangles by
using the rule, numerically and with variables.
77 minutes 83 minutes
7.4.2. The paths of justification
Figure 86 presents the paths of justification for the statement The angle sum of a triangle is
180o, by class and textbook.
Statement Class L1 Class L2 Textbook C
Angle sum
of a ∆
e=experimental demonstrations/g =deduction using a specific case/ a general case.
Figure 86. Paths of justification in Lena's classes for Angle sum of a triangle
Rearranging e
Rearranging e
Rearranging e
Parallel line s
Parallel line g
113 | Paths of justification in Lena's classes
7.4.2.1. The path of justification in the textbook
The path of justification in Textbook C comprised three instances of justification. First, the
textbook offered experimental demonstration by angle rearrangement (i.e., the interior
angles are rearranged to form a straight line, see Figure 87). Based on the physical
experiment, students were asked to make a conjecture regarding the angle sum of a triangle,
and then the textbook stated that the conjecture will be properly verified. Two items were
offered involving parallel line (i.e., relying on the Alternate Interior Angle theorem twice to
find three angles that form a straight line): first by deduction using a specific case (see Figure
88), and then by deduction using a general case (see Figure 89).
Figure 87. Angle sum of a triangle – Angle rearrangement (Textbook C, vol 3, p. 172)
Figure 88. Angle sum of a triangle – Parallel line (adapted from Textbook C, vol 3, p. 173)
Figure 89. Angle sum of a triangle – Parallel line (Textbook C, vol 3, p. 173)
Section 7.4 – Angle sum of a triangle | 114
7.4.2.2. The paths of justification in the classrooms
The paths of justification in Lena's classes were very similar to each other and relied on the
textbook. In both classes, the paths included one instance of justification, relying on
experimental demonstration by angle rearrangement.
In both classes, Lena read the textbook task (see Figure 87) and used gestures to describe how
the angles of the triangle were rearranged. In both classes, Lena was the provider of the
justification, and the students helped phrase the rule. For example, in Class L2:
Lena: Pay attention to the task, we are not going to do it […] Look at [page] 172, the
way they tore it. They had ABC triangle and they wanted to know, without a protractor
[…] They had a triangle, do you see it?
Students: Yes.
Lena: They tore it in some manner, to know what the angle sum is, and they added A, B,
and C. Can you see the illustration below? [points at Figure 87] And we see that if we add
the three angles of the triangle, what do we get?
Student: 180 degrees.
Lena: 180, straight angle. […] This is the proof you need to remember, why for the three
angles inside a triangle, their sum is 180. You can do the experiment. You'll tear it and
try to connect it [gestures with her hands].
Similarly, in Class L1, Lena explicitly referred to this instance of justification as a proof that
the angle sum of a triangle is a straight angle.
Lena: The proof is like so – if you add all three, you get a straight angle, and you know
that a straight angle is 180. Therefore, any triangle, if I add all three, what do I get?
Students: 180, a straight angle.
Then, in both classes, Lena instructed her students to solve a textbook task (see Figure 88) in
two ways: (1) by relying on the rule, and (2) by relying on the congruence of alternate angles
between parallel lines. Lena then described these two ways as equivalent and sufficient for
exam questions. This was not regarded in class as a justification for the rule and accordingly
was not coded as an instance of justification.
115 | Paths of justification in Lena's classes
7.5. Area of a disk
7.5.1. Lesson graphs
Class L1 Class L2 Activity (student grouping)
2 minutes
– Administration
Non-academic activities (e.g., management, announcements, discipline)
8 minutes
8 minutes
Defining terminology (Whole class)
Lena discusses the following terms: circle, disk, radius, chord, and
diameter. The discussion involves asking students what each term is,
defining the term, and the appropriate mathematical notation.
6 minutes
5 minutes
The perimeter of a circle (Whole class)
Lena tells the student a story about how the constant ratio between the
perimeter of a circle and its diameter was discovered.
Lena deduces that in order to calculate the perimeter of a circle, one has
to multiply its diameter by π.
In L2: Lena demonstrates solving a numerical example by using the
rule, and emphasizes writing an exact answer and not an approximation
(e.g., the perimeter of a circle with radius 3 is 6π and not 18.84).
5 minutes
7 minutes
The area of a disk (Whole class)
Lena inquires whether any student remembers how to calculate the area
of a disk. Students make suggestions, among them is π times radius
squared. Lena approves and dictates the rule:
In L1: ‘S = radius*radius*π = radius2*π’.
In L2: ‘S = r*r*π = r2*π’.
Lena demonstrates solving a numerical example by using the rule.
– 47 minutes
The area of a disk (Individual student work)
In L2: Students work on textbook tasks: calculating the radius and
perimeter of a circle, and the area of a disk, all by using the rules.
18 minutes
9 minutes
Perimeter and area (Whole class)
Lena solves a question involving the area and perimeter of a circle. The
question was taken from an exam similar to an upcoming regional
exam.
39 minutes 76 minutes
Section 7.5 – Area of a disk | 116
7.5.2. The paths of justification
Figure 90 presents the paths of justification for the statement The area formula for a disk with
radius r is πr2, by class and textbook.
Statement Class L1 Class L2 Textbook C
Area of a
disk
– –
g =deduction using a general case.
Figure 90. Paths of justification in Lena's classes for Area of a disk
7.5.2.1. The path of justification in the textbook
The path of justification in Textbook C comprised one instance of justification. The textbook
offered a process of deduction using a general case by dissection (i.e., dissecting a disk into
sectors and rearranging them to form an approximate rectangle, see Figure 91). Students were
given a disk with unspecified measures and were required to estimate the measures of the
sides of the approximate rectangle. However, neither the textbook nor the teacher's guide
specified how to determine these measures (e.g., numerically or with pronumerals). In
addition, the relation between the circumference formula and the area was explicitly stated
only after the task (see Figure 92).
Figure 91. Area of a disk – Dissection into sectors (Textbook C, part 3, p. 156)
Dissection
g
117 | Paths of justification in Lena's classes
Figure 92. Area of a disk – the circumference and the area (Textbook C, part 3, p. 156)
7.5.2.1. The paths of justification in the classrooms
Lena presented the rule but did not offer any instances of justification in either class.
In both classes, Lena prefaced by describing the lesson as a review of a topic they had learned
in the preceding year (i.e., in elementary school) and had not discussed since. Then, Lena
inquired whether any of the students remembered the area formula of a disk. Several students
made an attempt at answering it, calling out several suggestions, until one student gave the
correct formula. Lena confirmed and dictated the rule. For example, in Class L1:
Lena: How do I calculate the area, anybody remembers?
Student1: Me, me, me! Radius times Pi!
Student2: Pi times the diameter! Diameter times 3.14!
Student3: Radius squared
Student4: I know! Radius plus radius- [Lena signals to start over] radius times radius
[Lena signals to continue] times Pi.
Lena: Well done, radius times radius […] times Pi.
Classroom observations reveal that justification was neither requested nor given in Lena's
classes, either by Lena or by the students. After stating the rule, Lena instructed the students
to solve a task by using the rule. However, Lena expressed a different approach to the need
for justification for this statement in the concluding interview.
Lena spoke about the importance she sees in showing 7th grade students why things they
learned in elementary school are true. Lena described the difference between proving a rule
in the seventh grade and merely stating it at the elementary school level:
The bar is raised. In third and fourth grades you just state the formula and demonstrate in
one, two, three, four ways. You don't prove. There's no proof in sixth and fifth grades.
[…] In higher grades you prove. It is different, because then you explain why.
Section 7.5 – Area of a disk | 118
Additionally, Lena was shown a set of three paths of justification for this statement (see
Figure 93). In this set, one teacher states the rule without offering any justification, claiming
she's pressed for time and that most students are already familiar with the formula; the second
teacher offers a path with two instances of justification, relying on two types of dissection –
into sectors and into concentric rings; and the third teacher offers a path with two instances of
justification, relying first on grid approximation (i.e., counting squares that coincide with the
disk) and then on dissection into sectors.
Figure 93. A set of paths of justification for area of a disk (interview item)
Lena claimed that unlike the first teacher, none of her students ever remembers the area
formula on their own. Furthermore, Lena described her own path of justification as similar to
the third teacher yet comprising only the first item (i.e., relying on the grid approximation
justification strategy). When asked to elaborate, Lena's answer suggested a limited
understanding of the reasoning of the strategy:
119 | Paths of justification in Lena's classes
Lena: I put a disk inside a square, and then we count the squares – one, two, three, four,
this can be completed to five [pointing at the top-middle square], and this to six
[pointing at the bottom-middle square].
Interviewer: [pointing at one corner] what about this here?
Lena: That's it, the sides are pi. That's a supplement.
Interviewer: Wait, do you count squares?
Lena: I count the squares, yes. […] We can see that the area of the disk is less than nine
[…] Less than nine, more than five. How can I know? So I tell them that the
supplements are pi. You need to multiply by pi. That's why, if we have a square, it's
three times three, so it's three squared, so I multiply by pi, because I have those little
bits. And then they [i.e., the students] remember.
Section 7.6 – Summary | 120
7.6. Summary
In this section I discuss the contribution of the textbook, together with the teacher and the
students to shaping students' opportunities to learn how to explain and justify mathematical
statements in Lena's classes. Figure 94 presents the paths of justification for each of the five
observed statements, by class.
Statement Class L1 Class L2 Textbook C
Equivalent
equations
Area of a
trapezium
Vertical
angles
– –
Angle sum
of a ∆
Area of a
disk
– –
e=experimental demonstration; r=concordance of a rule with a model; m/s/g =deduction using
a model/ a specific case/ a general case; D=Dissection, C=Construction.
Figure 94. Paths of justification in Lena's classes, by statement
The textbook was the main source for instances of justification in Lena's classes. Analysis of
the paths of justification revealed that for each mathematical statement, every justification
strategy and almost every justification type that Lena offered in her classes, were offered in
the textbook as well and in the same order.
Based on the results of the analysis conducted in Part I of this study, it appears that instances
of justification from other textbooks were not found in the observed lessons. Lena
occasionally used other sources (e.g., other textbooks and worksheets), merely as a resource
for additional tasks and activities. Lena described this use as a result of her impression of
Textbook C as containing an insufficient number of basic-level exercises.
Balance
m
Balance
m
Balance
m
D
s
C
s
D
s
D
s
D
e
D
s
D
r
C
s
D
s
D
s
D
e
C
g
C
s
D
s
D
s
D
e
Supplementary
s
Supplementary
g
Rearranging e
Rearranging e
Rearranging e
Parallel line s
Parallel line g
Dissection
g
121 | Paths of justification in Lena's classes
Near-identical paths were offered in both classes. In the concluding teacher interview Lena
implied that the similarity may be intentional, and may reflect a similarity in her perception
of the level of the students: "The level of each class was essentially the same […] so the
worksheets and the lesson plans were almost identical in both classes."
The general similarity between the paths of justification in the textbook and in the classes
suggests that Lena often followed teaching sequences suggested by the textbook. However,
despite these similarities, several differences were found – pertaining mostly to deductive
types of justification.
First, several instances of justification were offered in the textbook but not in Lena's classes.
Most of these excluded instances were coded as deduction using a general case – the type of
justification closest to a formal proof. Moreover, for area of a trapezium and angle sum of a
triangle, Lena followed the path of justification offered in the textbook, but excluded
instances of justification which relied on deduction using a general case. Lena did not offer
justification for the other two statements.
The absence of the deductive justification type in Lena's classes is likely intentional. Lena
described justification and proof as important for remembering the material, instead of rote
learning, yet not suitable for all students:
It depends on the kid's level. Some children are not ready, it does not matter whether you
explain to them – they will not understand. […] However, for those with [mathematical]
thinking, that they're good at it, it was important to me, yes, because then they know the
origin, the 'why', and then it is easier to remember the formula. They don't memorize.
Furthermore, Lena described the extensive preparation required in classes with mixed ability
before proof is given: "If the [ability] level is mixed, in geometry, I cannot just give a proof
directly without taking into consideration those who do not understand." As an interim
solution, her advanced students were given the option to study geometry separately, in a
small group with a supporting teacher, focusing on proof and proving: "Our intention was
that as soon as seventh grade geometry lessons begin, she [the supporting teacher] will teach
them […] what proof is, how to write it, why we do it."
Lena introduced two mathematical statements in class without any justification. In both cases,
neither Lena nor any student asked for a justification to be provided. Classroom observations
suggest that Lena had considered these statements as either self-explanatory (e.g., vertical
angles) or as known results (e.g., area of a disk).
Section 7.6 – Summary | 122
Additionally, Lena made a few alterations to the paths of justification offered in the textbook.
For example, for angle sum of a triangle, Lena regarded an empirical experiment as a
sufficient proof for the statement, whereas the textbook path of justification regarded it as an
opportunity to make a conjecture before providing a deductive justification. For area of a
trapezium, Lena altered the type of justification of one instance of justification from
deductive to empirical. The change was likely related to student difficulties.
Moreover, Lena was the sole initiator of instances of justification in her classes. Lena
commonly requested the students to make a claim (e.g., cite a fact or generate a conjecture)
regarding the mathematical statement in question. Then, one or more students attempted at
phrasing the claim to the teacher's satisfaction. Once the claim was properly phrased, either
Lena provided one or more instances of justification for it, during which students participated
by answering specific questions, or the claim was left without any justification. The students
were not requested to provide additional justifications for any of the observed claims, even
when no justification was offered by the teacher or when mistakes were made in the process.
The classroom atmosphere in both classes was typically noisy. As a result, the flow of most
lessons was interrupted frequently for disciplinary purposes in light of excessive noise and
behavioural issues. These interruptions contributed to shaping the paths of justification by
cutting short several classroom discussions, some of them pertaining to instances of
justification.
123 | Paths of justification in Millie's classes
8. Paths of justification in Millie's classes
This chapter further examines the ways in which the textbook, together with the teacher and
the students, shape the opportunities offered for students to learn to explain and justify. It
focuses on one case study – Millie and her classes. Chapter 7 dealt with Lena and her classes.
Millie received a college bachelor's degree in business management, and later received her
teaching credentials in mathematics from a teachers' college, in a teaching certification
program for those holding an academic degree. She had three years of prior experience
teaching mathematics, all at the same junior-high school.
When observations began in December 2015, there were eight 7th grade classes in the school
and two classes for lower-track students (Mitzuy). Each lower-track class comprised students
from four classes. In late March 2016 the lower-track was cancelled and students rejoined
their original classes.
Millie taught two 7th grade classes. When observations began: Class M1 with 32 students
(main stream), and Class M2 with 20 students (lower-track). After the lower-track classes
were disassembled: Class M1 with 35 students (32 stayed from the original M1), and Class
M2 with 30 students (5 stayed from the original M2). Observations suggest that most students
actively participated in the classroom and there were very few disciplinary issues.
The year of data collection was the fourth year Millie had used Textbook C. In the interview
Millie conveyed that she was fond of the way the textbook presented mathematics to students
by using real-life examples, and that she relied mostly on it when planning her lessons. In
class, Millie projected the textbook on the whiteboard and interacted with it.
Observations in Millie's classrooms were made for five mathematical statements, two in
algebra and three in geometry: Equivalent equations, Product of negatives, Vertical angles,
Corresponding angles, and Area of a disk. For each statement, the lesson in Class M1 took
place before the lesson in Class M2, commonly within the same week.
This chapter comprises six sections. The first five sections deal with the paths of justification
in the observed classrooms for each statement. Each section begins with lesson graphs which
provide a general outline of the observed lessons in each class. The graphs describe the main
sections of the observed lesson, along with a graphic representation of the duration of each
section in each class. The graphs are followed by a description of the paths of justification in
the textbook and in the classes. The sixth and final section summarizes the case study.
Section 8.1 – Equivalent equations | 124
8.1. Equivalent equations
8.1.1. Lesson graphs
Class M1 Class M2 Activity (grouping)
10 minutes
8 minutes
Administration
Non-academic activities (e.g., management, announcements, discipline)
28 minutes
35 minutes
Equation solving (Whole class)
Lesson goal – learning to solve a new type of equations.
Launching task – finding the weight of a ball on a balanced scale. Millie
discussed the relation between operations on the scale and operations on
a corresponding equation.
6 minutes
4 minutes
Equation solving (Individual student work)
Students work on textbook tasks: solving equations with and without the
balance model, and attending to the limitations of the model.
42 minutes
31 minutes
Word problems (Whole class)
Millie provides an algorithm for approaching and solving word problems.
86 minutes 78 minutes
8.1.2. The paths of justification
Figure 95 presents the paths of justification for the statement Performing valid operations on
both sides of an equation yields an equivalent equation, by class and textbook. Each step
represents a single instance of justification by order of appearance in the textbook/classroom
lesson, and both the justification strategy and type are presented.
Statement Class M1 Class M2 Textbook C
Equivalent
equations
m = deduction using a model.
Figure 95. Paths of justification in Millie's classes for Equivalent equations
8.1.2.1. The path of justification in the textbook
This path was described in discussion of Lena's classes (see Section 7.1.2).
Balance
m
Balance
m
Balance
m
125 | Paths of justification in Millie's classes
8.1.2.2. The paths of justification in the classrooms
The paths of justification in Millie's classes were very similar to the textbook path and to
each other. In both classes, the paths included one instance of justification, relying on
balance model in a deduction using a model (see Figure 96). Millie solved a task that involved
finding the weight of a ball on a balanced scale by performing operations on a balance model.
Then, she made connected between operations on the model and operations on an equation
(e.g., subtracting a number from both sides of an equation is modelled as removing that
number of weights from both sides of the scale).
Figure 96. Balance model (screenshot in Class M2)
In addition, Millie briefly referred in both classes to the limitations of the balance model.
After describing the importance of performing the same operation on both sides of a balanced
scale, Millie mentioned one type of operation – removal of items. In each class, a student
commented that there are other operations (e.g., addition and nullifying). Millie confirmed
and added that the balance model helps only with positive numbers, not with negatives. No
further discussion of these limitations was offered or requested in the observed lessons.
Section 8.2 – Product of negatives | 126
8.2. Product of negatives
8.2.1. Lesson graphs
Class M1 Class M2 Activity (student grouping)
7 minutes
1 minute
Administration
Non-academic activities (e.g., management, announcements, discipline)
20 minutes
25 minutes
Completing a multiplication table (Whole class)
Launching task – students multiply numbers by zero and calculate
products of positive integers (see Figure 100).
Millie directs the students to observe the pattern formed in the rows and
columns of the table and complete it row by row.
Millie dictates the sign law and provides a mnemonic for it.
A student comments that in order to multiply two signed numbers they
need more than just the sign. Millie responds that they will learn by
example.
22 minutes
11 minutes
Using the sign law (Whole class + Individual student work)
In M1: Millie writes 10 multiplication exercises, demonstrates how to
solve the first two, and then students work on the list (6 minutes). Millie
solves the tasks together with the students (13 minutes).
In M2: Millie writes 6 multiplication exercises on the board, and
demonstrates how to solve each one.
18 minutes
38 minutes
Multiplying more than two numbers (Whole class)
Launching task – students calculate products with varying number of
negative factors, in order to find a pattern for the sign of the product.
Millie dictates a rule: ‘when multiplying more than two numbers: (1) if
the numbers of negative factors is odd, the product is negative. (2) if the
numbers of negative factors is even, the product is positive.’
4 minutes
–
Multiplying more than two numbers (Individual student work)
Students solve a textbook task: determining the sign of a product. Millie
instructs the students to count the number of negative factors.
6 minutes
11 minutes
Exponents with negative bases (Whole class)
Millie demonstrates a calculation of powers of negative numbers and
dictates a rule:
In M1: ‘if the power is an odd number, the result is negative, if it is an
even number, the result is positive.’
In M2: ‘if the base is negative, we look at the power. Even -> the result
is positive, odd -> the result is negative.’
77 minutes 86 minutes
127 | Paths of justification in Millie's classes
8.2.2. The paths of justification
Figure 97 presents the paths of justification for the statement The product of two negative
numbers is a positive number, by class and textbook.
Statement Class M1 Class M2 Textbook C
Product of
negatives
s =deduction using a specific case.
Figure 97. Paths of justification in Millie's classes for Product of negatives
8.2.2.1. The path of justification in the textbook
The path of justification in Textbook C for this statement was based on two items, one of
which was intended for advanced students.
The first item relied on discovering patterns (i.e., identifying patterns and extrapolating them,
see Figure 98) by deduction using a specific case. Students were required to complete a
multiplication table of numbers ranging from -3 to 3, by following a set of guided steps. The
steps began with using the property of zero and prior knowledge regarding multiplication of
positive integers, and ended with determining the product of negative numbers. The last steps
involved making a conjecture regarding the outcome of the product of negatives and testing it
by continuing a sequence of products. However, the textbook did not specify why it is
allowed to assume that there is a constant difference between each two consecutive elements
in the sequence, or discuss the problem in determining the rule of a sequence based on a finite
number of elements.
(a) (b) Figure 98. Product of negatives – Discovering patterns (Textbook C, vol 2, pp. 42-43)
Patterns
s
Patterns
s
Patterns
s
Extension
s
Section 8.2 – Product of negatives | 128
The second textbook item relied on deduction using a specific case, by extension of
properties (i.e., extending arithmetical properties from natural numbers to negatives, see
Figure 99). Students were required to copy each stage of the calculation and justify it.
Justification involved the use of the multiplicative property of zero and of the distributive
property of multiplication over addition. Following the calculation of the generic example,
students were requested to give the rule. According to the teacher's guide, this item was
intended for advanced students who are interested in the structure of mathematics.
Figure 99. Product of negatives – Extension of properties (Textbook C, vol 2, p. 44)
Historically, the product of negatives was defined to be positive in order to allow a consistent
extension of the arithmetical laws from the natural numbers to signed numbers. However,
such an explanation was not found in any of the textbooks.
8.2.2.2. The paths of justification in the classrooms
Paths of justification in Millie's classes comprised one instance of justification: discovering
patterns by deduction using a specific case (see Figure 100(a)). In both classes, Millie began
by relying on known facts: the product of positive numbers is positive, and the special
properties of multiplication by one and by zero. Then, she instructed her students to pay
attention to the patterns formed in each row and column in the table. By viewing each row
and column as a sequence of numbers, Millie highlighted the constant difference between
successive values in each sequence. First, Millie attended to the two quadrants dealing with
the product of a negative and a positive, and then to the quadrant involving the product of
negative numbers (see Figure 100(b)).
129 | Paths of justification in Millie's classes
(a) (b) Figure 100. Discovering patterns (screenshots in Class M1 [a] and Class M2 [b])
In both classes, students actively participated in completing the table. However, it is not clear
whether they were convinced by it. In M1, after a student exclaimed she didn't understand the
lesson, several students attempted to assist her by relying on the mnemonic rather than on the
table. However, Millie quickly intervened and reminded the class that the justification for this
statement was based on the multiplication table.
Student1: I don't get it. Millie, I don't understand anything. How can a minus times a
minus equal a min-, equal a plus?
Student2: Because they are not negative together!
Student3: Let's say you have two black socks, they match, right? And a white sock and a
black sock don't match.
Student4: It's like not-not.
Millie: We discovered by using the table, by way of patterns, that negative numbers
times a negative, a negative times a negative actually gives a positive result, okay?
During the concluding interview, Millie was asked whether there are cases in which it is
unnecessary or not important to explain in the seventh grade why certain things are true. In
response, Millie stated that (1) she didn't know why the product of negatives is positive, and
(2) she doesn't dwell on this statement in class:
There are many things that cannot really be explained, I don't think they can, or I don't
know enough because I, myself, still feel that there are many things I need to learn […]
For example with the plus and minus. Why minus times minus is a plus. It really seems
to me like spending too much time. Truth is, I myself don't know and I need to find that
out. […] but I will not dwell on it, because exactly for that reason there are the nice and
easy ways to know that.
Section 8.2 – Product of negatives | 130
Additionally, Millie claimed that the item that relied on extension of properties was too
difficult – but did not specify whether it was difficult for her or for students. Millie was
shown a set of three paths of justification for this mathematical statement (see Figure 101). In
that set, one teacher offers a path similar to Textbook C (i.e., the same instances of
justification and in the same order), a second teacher provides only a mnemonic for the sign
law – without any justification, and the third teacher offers a path comprising two items,
based on a number-line model (i.e., modelling signed numbers as movement forward and
backward in time on a number line) and then on discovering patterns. Millie described the
first teacher’s path of justification as the closest to her own preferred way of justifying the
statement, yet clarified that she related only to the first item.
Figure 101. A set of paths of justification for product of negatives (Interview item).
131 | Paths of justification in Millie's classes
8.3. Vertical angles
8.3.1. Lesson graphs
Class M1 Class M2 Activity (student grouping)
6 minutes
5 minutes
Administration
Non-academic activities (e.g., management, announcements, discipline)
–
15 minutes
Recap: Equation solving (Whole class)
In M2: Millie demonstrates homework tasks involving equations.
–
11 minutes
Recap: Naming angles (Whole class)
In M2: Millie reviews angle addition and naming angles by 3 letters.
20 minutes
32 minutes
Defining supplementary angles (Whole class)
Launch – students identify pairs of angles which form a straight angle.
Millie defines supplementary angles as a pair of angles, formed by a
ray extended from a point on a line, whose sum is 180o.
22 minutes
13 minutes
Calculating angles (Individual student work + Whole class)
Students work on calculating angle measures (3-5 minutes).
Millie solves the tasks together with the students (10-17 minutes).
18 minutes
9 minutes
Defining vertical angles + phrasing the rule (Whole class)
Launching task – students identify pairs of vertical angles.
Millie defines vertical angles: ‘a pair of angles, formed by the
intersection of two lines, which are not supplementary angles’.
In M1: Millie sketches two intersecting lines, sets value to one angle,
and instructs the class to find the measures of the other angles. Students
approach the board in turns, calculate each angle and explain their
reasoning. A student suggests: ‘angles that are opposite are equal’.
Millie confirms and dictates: ‘vertically opposite angles are equal’.
In M2: Millie tells the class that vertical angles have a special property
which will be made clear later on – they are congruent. Millie gives an
example and dictates the rule: ‘vertically opposite angles are equal’.
23 minutes
–
Defining corresponding angles + phrasing the rule (Whole class)
Millie explains the term ‘corresponding’ by telling a story about
students switching tables but moving to their corresponding seats.
Millie copies an angle to a transparent sheet, places it on its
corresponding angle, and asks the class what can be seen. A student
responds that the angles are equal, and Millie approves and dictates the
rule: ‘every pair of corresponding angles is congruent’.
89 minutes 85 minutes
Section 8.3 – Vertical angles | 132
8.3.2. The paths of justification
Figure 102 presents the paths of justification for the statement Vertically opposite angles are
congruent, by class and textbook.
Statement Class M1 Class M2 Textbook C
Vertical
angles
–
s/g =deduction using a specific case/ a general case.
Figure 102. Paths of justification in Millie's classes for Vertical angles
8.3.2.1. The path of justification in the textbook
This path was described in discussion of Lena's classes (see Section 7.3.2).
8.3.2.2. The paths of justification in the classrooms
The lessons in both classes took place a few days before a high-stakes exam. The exam was
given to the entire cohort and covered the Vertically Opposite Angles Theorem. Each lesson
dealt with several subjects in preparation for the exam (e.g., equation solving and pairs of
angles – supplementary, vertical, corresponding, and alternate).
In Class M1, The path of justification comprised one instance, relying on deduction using a
specific case by supplementary angles (i.e., a third angle is identified as an angle that
supplements each of the vertically opposite angles). Millie sketched two intersecting lines,
marked one angle, and hinted that the students were permitted to apply their knowledge of
other types of angles. Students approached the board, determined the measures of the other
angles, and justified their assertion with the Supplementary Angles Theorem (see Figure
103). After the fourth angle was found, a student suggested that vertically opposite angles are
congruent. Millie confirmed, and summarized the activity.
Figure 103. Vertical angles – supplementary angles (screenshot in Class M1)
Supplement
s
Supplement
s
Supplement
g
133 | Paths of justification in Millie's classes
In Class M2, no justification was given in the observed lessons. Millie started discussing
vertical angles less than 10 minutes before the end of the lesson. Millie dictated the definition
and stated the rule along with the definition. She commented that justification will be given at
a later point in time: "I will find that there is an explanation for it, for vertical angles, I will
tell you now, we will do it in the future as well, we will find out they are also equal."
Analysis suggests that Millie introduced the rule in order to prepare her students for a
standardized exam that was held later that week, even if it meant postponing the justification.
Classroom observations were held in the following lesson, yet no justification was given at
that time either. At the beginning of that lesson, Millie summarized the definitions and rules
regarding two types of angles – supplementary angles and vertically opposite angles, without
justification. Justification was neither requested nor given by the students. The rest of the
lesson focused on corresponding angles and on alternate angles.
In the concluding interview, Millie described the differences she sees in justification for this
statement by ability grouping. Millie discussed the number of numerical examples each group
might need before they can figure out the rule, described the use of pronumerals as suitable
only in some classes, and emphasized that she refrains altogether from using letters in lower-
track classes: "In lower-track classes I would provide additional numerical examples, and let
them figure it on their own. I would completely avoid letters." Whereas in high-achieving
classes "one numerical example will suffice and then immediately the rule."
Section 8.4 – Corresponding angles | 134
8.4. Corresponding angles
8.4.1. Lesson graphs
Class M1 Class M2 Activity (student grouping)
6 minutes
4 minutes
Administration
Non-academic activities (e.g., management, announcements, discipline)
–
7 minutes
Recap: Supplementary and vertical angles (Whole class)
In M2: Millie summarizes the definitions and rules regarding two types
of angles – supplementary angles and vertically opposite angles.
20 minutes
– Defining supplementary angles (Whole class)
In M1: Launch – students identify pairs of angles which form a straight
angle. Millie defines supplementary angles as a pair of angles formed
by a ray extended from a point on a line, whose sum is 180o.
22 minutes
– Calculating angles (Individual student work + Whole class)
In M1: Students work on calculating angle measures (5 minutes). Millie
solves the tasks together with the students (17 minutes).
18 minutes
– Defining vertical angles + phrasing the rule (Whole class)
In M1: Launching task – students identify pairs of vertical angles.
Millie defines vertical angles: ‘a pair of angles formed by the
intersection of two lines, that are not supplementary angles’, sketches
two intersecting lines, sets value to one angle, and instructs the class to
find the measures of the other angles. Students approach, calculate
angles and explain. A student suggests: ‘opposite angles are equal’.
Millie approves and dictates: ‘vertically opposite angles are equal’.
23 minutes
48 minutes
Defining corresponding angles + phrasing the rule (Whole class)
Millie explains the term ‘corresponding’ by telling a story: "students
switch tables but move to their corresponding seats". Millie copies an
angle to a transparent sheet and places it on its corresponding angle.
In M1: Millie asks the class what can be seen. A student responds that
the angles are equal, Millie approves and dictates the rule.
In M2: Millie tells the class that the angles are equal, dictates the rule:
‘every pair of corresponding angles is congruent’, and solves examples.
–
27 minutes
Defining alternate angles + phrasing the rule (Whole class)
In M2: Millie explains the term ‘alternate’ by tweaking the story about
a group of students switching tables, copies an angle to a transparent
sheet, places it on its alternate angle, and tells the class that the angles
are equal. Millie dictates the rule: ‘alternate angles between parallel
lines are congruent’, and solves examples.
89 minutes 86 minutes
135 | Paths of justification in Millie's classes
8.4.2. The paths of justification
Figure 104 presents the paths of justification for the statement The corresponding angles
between parallel lines are equal, by class and textbook.
Statement Class M1 Class M2 Textbook C
Corresp.
angles
e=experimental demonstration.
Figure 104. Paths of justification in Millie's classes for Corresponding angles
8.4.2.1. The path of justification in the textbook
The path of justification in Textbook C comprised one instance of justification, relying on
experimental demonstration by measurement (i.e., direct comparison of the corresponding
angles by using a measuring tool). The textbook offered a choice of measuring tools, either a
protractor (see Figure 105), or a dynamic geometry software (see Figure 106).
Figure 105. Corresponding angles – measurement (Textbook C, vol 2, p. 189)
Figure 106. Corresponding angles – measurement (adapted from Textbook C, vol 2, p. 189)
Measuring
e
Measuring
e
Measuring
e
Section 8.4 – Corresponding angles | 136
8.4.2.2. The paths of justification in the classrooms
The paths of justification in both classes were very similar to the textbook. Millie offered one
instance of justification, relying on experimental demonstration by measurement both in
Class M1 (see Figure 107(a)) and in Class M2 (see Figure 107(b)). The students' involvement
was only in determining whether the two corresponding angles indeed appear congruent.
(a) (b) Figure 107. Measurement (screenshot in Class M1 [a] and Class M2 [b])
In both classes, Millie used a physical tool different from the one suggested in the textbook.
While the textbook suggests using a protractor, Millie reminded her students that she
promised them they will not be using a protractor anymore and instead used a sheet of paper
to copy the measures of the compared angles. In the concluding interview, Millie elaborated
that her intention was to convey to the students the importance of relying on what is explicitly
given, even if the sketch seems to imply different or additional information. However, Millie
did not seem aware that the justification she offered in class relied on measurement
nonetheless.
I have no intention of letting them measure. Measurement ended at the sixth grade. […]
Later, in ninth grade geometry, they need to understand that what is given to them is all
that is given. Even if something appears to be an isosceles triangle, if that is not given,
then it is not isosceles.
137 | Paths of justification in Millie's classes
8.5. Area of a disk
8.5.1. Lesson graphs
Class M1 Class M2 Activity (student grouping)
17 minutes
7 minutes
Administration
Non-academic activities (e.g., management, announcements, discipline)
38 minutes
26 minutes
Defining terminology (Whole class)
Millie discusses terminology: circle, disk, radius, chord, and diameter.
Millie defines each term (in M1: asks for the name of the term), and
provides mnemonics.
Millie defines central angle and arc, dictates a formula connecting these
terms, and demonstrates how to use it in a textbook task.
15 minutes
23 minutes
Defining terminology (Individual student work + Whole class)
Students calculate arc and central angles (5-6 minutes).
Millie solves the tasks together with the students (10-17 minutes).
10 minutes
23 minutes
The perimeter of a circle (Whole class)
Millie solves textbook tasks involving estimation of the perimeter of a
circle by inscribing it in a square and circumscribing it about a regular
hexagon. Millie deduces that the perimeter of a circle is between the
perimeters of these polygons, and denotes it 2πR.
7 minutes
11 minutes
The area of a disk (Whole class)
Millie shows a short video depicting an approximation of the area of a
disk by overlaying a grid and counting the coinciding squares.
In M2: Millie dissects a disk into a number of sectors.
87 minutes 90 minutes
16 minutes
25 minutes
Administration
Non-academic activities (e.g., management, announcements, discipline)
12 minutes
22 minutes
The area of a disk (Whole class)
Millie dissects a disk into a number of sectors and rearranges them as a
shape tending to a rectangle, yet incorrectly justifies why one of the
measures is rπ. Millie then dictates the rule: ‘the area of a disk is r2*π’.
21 minutes
34 minutes
The area of a disk (Individual student work + Whole class)
Students calculate area of disks (8-9 minutes).
Millie solves the tasks together with the students (13-25 minutes).
40 minutes
8 minutes
Arcs and regions (Whole class)
Millie solves textbook tasks involving arcs, sectors, and segments.
89 minutes 89 minutes
Section 8.5 – Area of a disk | 138
8.5.2. The paths of justification
Figure 108 presents the paths of justification for the statement The area formula for a disk
with radius r is πr2, by class and textbook.
Statement Class M1 Class M2 Textbook C
Area of a
disk
g =deduction using a general case.
Figure 108. Paths of justification in Millie's classes for Area of a disk
8.5.2.1. The path of justification in the textbook
This path was described in discussion of Lena's classes (see Section 7.5.2).
8.5.2.2. The paths of justification in the classrooms
The paths of justification in both classes were very similar to the textbook. Millie offered one
instance of justification, relying on deduction using a general case by dissection (i.e.,
dissecting a disk into sectors and rearranging them to form an approximate rectangle).
Millie projected a textbook item on the whiteboard – a dissected disk with radius r – both in
Class M1 (see Figure 109) and in Class M2 (see Figure 110). She discussed the dimensions of
the resulting rectangular shape, correctly determined that the lengths are r and rπ, but
justified incorrectly why the measure of the longer edge was rπ. Millie claimed that rπ was
the remainder of a process in which the radius is subtracted from the circumference of the
circle, instead of asserting that rπ represents one half of the circumference. Millie repeated
this erroneous reasoning several times in each class. The students accepted the justification
without challenge. For example, in Class M1:
Millie: The length of the rectangle is exactly like what?
Students: The radius.
Millie: The length of the radius. So what remains here? [points at the long edge of the
approximate rectangle] […] If this is my radius [points at the short edge], what is left
for the circumference? We were talking about the entire circumference of the circle.
The circumference is two radii and pi. Two radii times pi. If this is a radius, what is
left? The other radius and pi, right? That means, what is left for me is to complete it,
radius times pi.
Dissection
g
Dissection
g
Dissection
g
139 | Paths of justification in Millie's classes
Figure 109. Area of a disk – Dissection (screenshot in Class M1)
Figure 110. Area of a disk – Dissection (screenshot in Class M2)
As part of the concluding interview, Millie was shown a set of three paths of justification for
this statement (see Figure 111). In this set, one teacher states the rule without offering any
justification, claiming she's pressed for time and that most students are already familiar with
the formula; the second teacher offers a path with two instances of justification, relying on
two types of dissection – into sectors and into concentric rings; and the third teacher offers a
path with two instances of justification, relying first on grid approximation (i.e., counting
squares that coincide with the disk) and then on dissection into sectors.
Millie discussed the importance she sees in justifying this statement in class. She identified
with the first teacher, and claimed that 7th grade students cannot fully understand every step
of the proof, especially given the time pressure. Furthermore, she claimed it is unnecessary
because students are not required to know why or how the formula was found. Nevertheless,
Millie stated that her ideal path of justification will be the one described above.
Section 8.5 – Area of a disk | 140
Figure 111. A set of paths of justification for area of a disk (interview item).
A methodological note: in each class, Millie began by presenting a short video. The video
demonstrated grid approximation (see Figure 112(a)), and showed its accuracy by calculating
the area in two ways: by approximation and by using the area formula (see Figure 112(b)).
However, Millie instructed her students to attend mostly to a segment showing a decimal
representation of the mathematical constant π. Moreover, in the concluding interview, Millie
referred to this video as a way to excite the students. This was not coded as an instance of
justification.
(a) (b) Figure 112. Grid with Concordance of a rule with a model (screenshots in Class M1)
141 | Paths of justification in Millie's classes
8.6. Summary
In this section I discuss the contribution of the textbook, together with the teacher and the
students to shaping students' opportunities to learn how to explain and justify mathematical
statements in Millie's classes. Figure 113 presents the paths of justification for each of the five
observed statements, by class.
Statement Class M1 Class M2 Textbook C
Equivalent
equations
Product of
negatives
Vertical
angles
–
Corresp.
angles
Area of a
disk
e=experimental demonstration; m/s/g =deduction using a model/ a specific case/ a general case.
Figure 113. Paths of justification in Millie's classes, by statement
The textbook was the main source for instances of justification in Millie's classes. Analysis of
the paths of justification revealed that for each mathematical statement, every justification
strategy and almost every justification type that Millie offered in her classes, were offered in
the textbook as well and in the same order. Moreover, for each statement, almost every
instance of justification in the textbook was offered in Millie's classes as well.
The textbook received a special place in Millie's classes. During the lessons, Millie projected
the textbook on the whiteboard and interacted with it for solving tasks and activities.
Moreover, based on the results of the analysis conducted in Part I of this study, it appears that
other textbooks were not used as sources for instances of justification.
Balance
m
Balance
m
Balance
m
Patterns
s
Patterns
s
Patterns
s
Extension
s
Supplement
s
Supplement
s
Supplement
g
Measuring
e
Measuring
e
Measuring
e
Dissection
g
Dissection
g
Dissection
g
Section 8.6 – Summary | 142
Near-identical paths of justification were offered in both classes. This is noteworthy
especially because of differences in student ability levels between the classes (i.e., lower-
track students in Class M2 and the rest in Class M1). In the concluding interview, Millie
discussed her belief in teaching all students in a similar way, as basic as possible, regardless
of their ability. According to Millie, the level of ability dictates a different scope and pace: "I
like using the same methods. The way I see it, any method that helps lower-track students can
help those whose level is good and even support them, so essentially I use the same teaching
methods and materials."
The great similarity between the paths of justification in the textbook and in the classes
suggests that Millie often followed teaching sequences suggested by the textbook. However,
despite these similarities, two main differences were found.
First, for two statements – area of a disk and product of negatives – Millie followed the path
of justification offered in the textbook, yet the inference process presented in her classes was
flawed. For example, the key claim in the inference process for product of negatives in her
classes was left unwarranted. Additionally, Millie described the justification for both
statements as difficult. This is likely related to the absence of explicit explanation in the
textbook, but might reflect gaps in Millie's knowledge as well.
Second, for vertical angles, Millie offered justification only in Class M1 and did not justify it
in Class M2. Millie stated the rule and commented that justification will be provided at a later
point in time. Additional observations were conducted in Class M2 in subsequent lessons, yet
no justification was observed.
Millie was the sole initiator of instances of justification in her classes. Millie commonly
requested the students to make a claim (e.g., cite a fact or generate a conjecture) regarding the
mathematical statement in question. Then, one or more students attempted at phrasing the
claim to the teacher's satisfaction. Once the claim was properly phrased, Millie typically
provided one or more instances of justification for it, while engaging the students by asking
questions (except in one case, in which the claim was left without any justification or
explanation). The students were not requested to provide additional justifications for any of
the observed claims, and they neither challenged the teacher's justification nor opposed it,
even when mistakes were made in the process.
143 | Discussion
9. Discussion
The study deals with justification and explanation. It comprises two parts: The first part
examined the opportunities offered in 7th grade Israeli textbooks for students to learn how to
justify mathematical statements; the second part examined the ways in which the textbook, in
conjunction with the teacher and the students, shape the opportunities offered in 7th grade
Israeli classrooms to learn how to justify.
In this chapter I present a summary of my results and discuss my main findings. The
discussion addresses each part separately and the work as a whole. Last, I address the
contributions of this study to practice and the research community, discuss its limitations, and
suggest directions for future research.
9.1. Opportunities in the textbooks to learn to justify
Part I of this study joins a line of research that focuses on the justifications offered in
textbooks for mathematical claims and statements (e.g., Bergwall & Hemmi, 2017; Dolev,
2011; Hanna & de Bruyn, 1999; Stacey & Vincent, 2009). Previous textbook studies regarded
each instance of justification as an independent unit. This study suggests a novel approach,
which views textbook justification as the complete sequence of instances of justification that
are offered for a mathematical statement – its path of justification. This shift of focus was
intended to better reflect the nature of textbook justifications and thus to better characterize
the opportunities that are offered to students to learn to justify.
The study investigated the paths of justification for ten mathematical statements in eight
Israeli 7th grade mathematics textbooks – a total of 80 paths. Analysis focused on three
attributes: (1) path length – the number of instances of justification offered in a textbook for
each mathematical statement; (2) characteristics of the instances comprising the path –
justification strategies and types; and (3) sequencing – the order in which instances of
justification were offered in the textbook.
The main findings are as follows: (1) For most statements, paths of justification involved
similar sequences across textbooks; (2) Paths of justification in algebra and in geometry were
structured differently and involved different justification types; and (3) Paths of justification
in textbooks of different scopes (i.e., limited and standard/expanded) were structured
similarly – except for instances of the type of justification closest to a formal proof. In this
section I discuss these findings. I focus on three aspects: the paths of justification,
justification in algebra and in geometry, and justification for students with low achievements.
Discussion – Opportunities in the textbooks to learn to justify | 144
9.1.1. The paths of justification
The lengths of the paths of justification varied greatly among the analyzed textbooks: where
some textbooks offered long paths for a mathematical claim or statement, other textbooks
offered rather short paths – with one or two instances of justification. Moreover, long paths
involved an assortment of justification strategies and types. In other words, the inclusion of
several justification strategies, or of multiple types of justification for certain justification
strategies, had contributed to extending these paths of justification. These differences in path
lengths imply a great variety among textbooks in students’ opportunities to learn to justify.
Long paths were found to offer students a variety of opportunities, which in turn are likely to
have an additive effect: They provide different ways in which students can be convinced of a
mathematical truth, even if the justification is not considered sufficient in mathematics
(Sierpinska, 1994); Additionally, long paths can teach students that there is more than one
"right" way of justifying (Lampert, 1990; Schoenfeld, 1992).
Paths of justification typically comprised deductive and/or empirical types of justification,
while external justifications were near absence. Empirical and deductive types are generally
considered desirable in mathematics education (e.g., Harel & Sowder, 2007; Stylianides,
2009). Similar results were found in the literature – both regarding the abundance of
empirical and deductive types in textbook justifications, (e.g., Bergwall & Hemmi, 2017;
Dolev, 2011; Hanna & de Bruyn, 1999; Otten, Males, & Gilbertson, 2014; Thompson, Senk,
& Johnson, 2012) and the low ratio of external types (e.g., Cabassut, 2005; Otten, Gilbertson,
et al., 2014; Ronda & Adler, 2017; Stacey & Vincent, 2009).
Despite the differences in lengths, the order and sequencing of most paths were similar across
the analyzed textbooks. In almost all paths that included experimentation and deduction using
either a specific or a general case, the empiric type preceded the deductive type/s. Similarly,
in paths that included both Deduction using a specific case and Deduction using a general
case, a generic example always preceded the general case. However, the general case was not
always preceded by a generic example – it did so only in a third of the paths that involved the
general case. The frequent sequences found in this study are very common in mathematics
education and are in accordance with theories of learning and cognitive development, which
involve moving from concrete to abstract (e.g., Piaget, 1964). The low frequency of a specific
case before the general case is somewhat surprising, given the didactical value of generic
examples for introducing the deductive structure of mathematics and as a step that can help
students generalize and achieve formal abstraction (e.g., Harel & Tall, 1991).
145 | Discussion
For most mathematical statements, almost every justification strategy corresponded to a
single type of justification across the textbooks. For example, for the statement Division by
zero, all 16 instances of the justification strategy inverse of multiplication used the same
justification type – deduction using a specific case, and for Area of a disk, all eight instances
of the justification strategy dissection relied on deduction using a general case. As a result,
the order in which justification strategies were offered in the analyzed textbooks was directly
related to the sequences of justification types described above. This association between the
two characteristics of the instances of justification may shed light on the structure of the paths
of justification, as well as on sequences of justification strategies that may benefit students in
learning how to justify by relying on knowledge on cognitive development.
The reported similarities across textbooks may reflect shared views among textbook authors
about potentially useful principles for helping students learn to justify in mathematics. The
findings suggest at least three shared principles: (1) deductive and empirical justification
types are preferred, (2) paths of justification should progress from empirical to deductive
justifications, and (3) these sequences are preferred regardless of path length.
The preference of deductive and empirical justification types is in accordance with the Israeli
school curriculum for grades 7-9 (Israel Ministry of Education, 2009). The Israeli curriculum
explicitly emphasizes justification, explanation, and proof, for both algebra and geometry:
Understanding the essence of algebra as a mathematical branch that deals with processes
of generalization, generating conjectures, and justifying them; Developing argumentative
discourse: ways to explain or prove algebraic properties and rules; … Discovery of
attributes of geometric figures and geometric facts and understanding the deductive
relations among them; … Giving explanation and proof for geometric properties (p. 3).
The Israeli curriculum emphasizes proof instead of "checking multiple cases in which the
claim is true." (p. 10). Justifications that are pre-deductive in nature are favored in the 7th
grade: "geometry studies in the 7th and 8th grades can be referred to as 'pre-deductive'." (p.
28). The deductive structure of geometry is first introduced in the middle of the 8th grade for
all students, in part because "it is important to know the deductive structure of geometry as
part of the general human culture." (p. 9). This emphasis on justification exemplifies the
intention of the Israeli curriculum developers to address elements which are considered by
many to be central components of doing and learning mathematics (e.g., Ayalon & Even,
2010; Ball & Bass, 2003; Cabassut, 2005; Chazan, 1993; Yackel & Hanna, 2003). Similarly,
Discussion – Opportunities in the textbooks to learn to justify | 146
many school mathematics curricula around the world attribute a central role to developing
students' ability to justify, at all grade levels and across content domains (e.g., Australian
Education Council, 1991; Common Core State Standards Initiative, 2010; Department of
Education, 2010; Finnish National Board of Education, 2003; NCTM - National Council of
Teachers of Mathematics, 2000; Swedish National Agency for Education, 2011).
The progression of sequences from empirical to deductive justifications is in line with the
Israeli curriculum as well. For most of the statements analyzed in the study, sequences (or
segments of sequences) which were very common in the analyzed textbooks involved
instances of justification similar to the instances suggested in the Israeli curriculum, and in
the same order. The strict requirements for curriculum adequacy might further explain both
these similarities and the other similarities found among the textbooks. Studies in several
countries found that textbooks often attempt to reflect national curriculum documents (e.g.,
Fan, Zhu, & Miao, 2013; Jones & Fujita, 2013; Valverde, Bianchi, Wolfe, Schmidt, &
Houang, 2002). The current findings might indicate a similar phenomenon in Israel.
However, the contribution of a national curriculum to shaping the types of justification
offered in textbooks might not necessarily be direct. For example, Bergwall and Hemmi
(2017) focused on integral calculus and found differences among textbooks from Sweden and
Finland in the justification types. They found that Finnish textbooks offered a greater number
of general proofs, compared with generic cases and non-proof, whereas in Swedish textbooks
the situation was reversed. However, as Hemmi, Lepik, and Viholainen (2013) found, proof
and deductive reasoning were emphasized strongly in Swedish upper secondary curriculum
documents, whereas Finnish upper secondary curriculum documents emphasize mathematical
thinking but do not mention proof at all.
9.1.2. Justification in algebra and in geometry
Paths of justification in algebra and in geometry were of similar lengths, yet some differences
were found in their structure. Specifically, different justification types were often involved in
each topic. Deduction using a general case was included solely in paths for geometry
statements, and Deduction using a specific case was used mostly either in paths for algebra
statements or in statements relying on an algebraic derivation (i.e., Area of a trapezium).
These differences may represent different opportunities for students to learn to justify.
Reserving the type of justification closest to a formal proof mainly for geometry statements
might convey to students that proof is a part of doing mathematics only in geometry and not
147 | Discussion
in algebra, where one could use “softer” ways of justification. Be that as it may, Deduction
using a specific case may allow students who are newcomers to algebra to experience an
inference process with a lower risk of ‘getting lost’ in algebraic manipulations.
The association between justification strategies and justification types, reported above, was
much stronger for algebra statements compared with geometry statements. In algebra, almost
every justification strategy corresponded to a single type of justification across the textbooks
for that mathematical statement. In geometry, however, several justification strategies
occurred multiple times in paths of justification, associated with different justification types.
For example, for Area of a trapezium, the 11 instances of the justification strategy
construction relied on four justification types, and for Angle sum of a triangle, the nine
instances of the justification strategy parallel line relied on two justification types. These
sequences often involved a process of generalization and a progression from empirical types
of justification to deductive ones. By repeating a certain justification strategy several times,
and offering a transition from an empirical type to deductive type, textbook authors may aim
to provide a soft entrance and a gradual transition from elementary school to the more
deductive justifications which are expected in junior high school.
The topic-based distinction between justification types is in line with the traditional
asymmetric emphasis on proof and proving in the teaching of geometry and algebra in school
(P. J. Davis & Hersh, 1981; Harel & Sowder, 1998). Historically, geometry was viewed as
the most appropriate domain for teaching proof and for developing students’ ability to reason
logically (M. Ayalon & Even, 2010; González & Herbst, 2006), whereas algebra was viewed
as a domain “concerned with generalized computational processes” (Sfard, 1995, p. 17).
Furthermore, this distinction is in line with previous textbook studies. Several studies report
that justification outside of geometry involves arguments about a specific case significantly
more often than general arguments, whereas geometry statements offer a greater number of
general arguments (e.g., Dolev, 2011; Stacey & Vincent, 2009; Thompson et al., 2012).
The topic-based distinction between justification types is not in accordance with the Israeli
school curriculum for grades 7-9 (Israel Ministry of Education, 2009). The Israeli curriculum
emphasizes justification for both algebra and geometry, and proof is regarded as a tool for
linking algebra and geometry (e.g., "connect and integrate algebra and geometry; for
examples: by giving an algebraic proof for a problem in geometry and vice versa" (p. 3)).
Discussion – Opportunities in the textbooks to learn to justify | 148
9.1.3. Justification for students with low achievements
Several similarities were found among paths of justification for each mathematical statement;
Paths comprised similar instances of justification and similar sequences across textbooks –
both in textbooks of limited scope, intended for students with low achievements, and in
textbooks of standard/expanded scope, intended for the general student population. Five out
of the six types of justification that were identified in the analyzed textbooks were offered in
textbooks of both scopes. Additionally, for each mathematical statement, justification
strategies were generally offered in textbooks of both scopes. Textbooks of both scopes
offered similar sequences, which translate to opportunities for students to transition from
empirical and inductive justification to a deductive proof scheme (Harel & Sowder, 2007).
However, two differences were found among the analyzed textbooks: in path characteristics
and in path lengths. Paths of justification in textbooks of standard/expanded scope involved a
greater number of instances of deduction using a general case compared with textbooks of
limited scope – roughly three times as much. This difference was not found to be statistically
significant, yet it is pronounced and noticeable. Additionally, path lengths in textbooks of
limited scope were consistently slightly shorter for most mathematical statements, compared
with textbooks of standard/expanded scope.
The difference in prevalence of deduction using a general case is in accordance with the
literature on teaching proof in classes of different achievement levels (e.g., Raudenbush,
Rowan, & Cheong, 1993). Generally, the literature demonstrates that mathematics teachers
differentiate their teaching based on certain characteristics of the students, such as low-
achieving students compared with high-achieving students (e.g., Even & Kvatinsky, 2009).
Specifically, students with low achievements are often given fewer and different
opportunities to learn to justify (e.g., Even & Kvatinsky, 2009; Zohar & Dori, 2003).
Moreover, justification is traditionally viewed as representing high-order thinking, and
therefore not suitable for students with low achievements (Zohar et al., 2001). Differences in
teaching approaches and the mathematics addressed in classes of different achievement levels
are well documented in the literature (e.g., Even & Kvatinsky, 2009, 2010; Hollingsworth,
McCrae, & Lokan, 2003; Metz, 1979; Oakes, 1985; Page, 1991; Wiliam, 1998; Zohar,
Degani, & Vaaknin, 2001; Zohar & Dori, 2003).
Additionally, this difference in justification types is in accordance with the Israeli school
curriculum for grades 7-9 (Israel Ministry of Education, 2009). The Israeli curriculum
149 | Discussion
suggests offering different types of justification to different students: "In teaching proofs
there are several steps towards writing a full proof in formal language, and it is necessary to
adjust the requirements [on formalism] to students' abilities." (p. 10). This is done in order to
accommodate different student levels, and also to "prevent a feeling of failure and make
[mathematics] more likeable for students, for example by differential teaching, accustomed to
the variability among students in regards to reasoning in geometry." (2009, p. 3).
9.2. Textbook, teacher, and students
Part I of the study focused on the opportunities which Israeli mathematics textbooks offer for
students to learn to explain and justify. However, several additional factors contribute to
shaping classroom teaching and learning, such as teacher and student characteristics, beliefs,
and expectations (M. Ayalon & Even, 2016; Chazan, 2000; Eisenmann & Even, 2011; Even
& Kvatinsky, 2010; Tarr et al., 2008). Part II examined the ways in which the textbook,
together with the teacher and the students, shape these opportunities.
The study utilized the "Same teacher – different classrooms" research design (e.g., Ayalon &
Even, 2015; Eisenmann & Even, 2009, 2011; Even, 2014; Even & Kvatinsky, 2009, 2010):
two case studies, each focused on a mathematics teacher who uses the same textbook in two
7th grade classes. For each teacher, the study investigated the paths of justification for five
mathematical statements. Comparative analyses of the paths of justification, by teacher, by
classroom, and by topic, focused on three attributes: path length, characteristics (i.e.,
justification strategies and types), and sequencing.
The main findings suggest that the textbook contributed greatly to shaping the paths of
justification and was the main source for instances of justification in all observed classrooms.
Paths of justification in every class were generally similar to the paths offered in the textbook
– both in the characteristics of each instance of justification and in their sequencing. Yet, the
teachers' perception of the abilities of their students was also instrumental in constructing the
paths of justifications in the classes. For example, instances of deduction using a general case
were excluded from classes for which proof was regarded as unsuitable, and instances of
justification that were marked in the textbook as intended for advanced students were
excluded if considered too difficult. Additionally, a noisy classroom environment interrupted
several discussions and contributed to altering a type of justification from deductive to
empirical. In this section I discuss these findings, focusing on the contribution of the
textbook, the teacher, and the students to shaping the opportunities to learn to justify in class.
Discussion – Textbook, teacher, and students | 150
The textbook was found to be the main source for instances of justification in the observed
lessons. Paths of justification in the observed classes were generally similar to the paths
offered in the textbook: every justification strategy and almost every justification type that
was offered in class was offered in the textbook as well and in the same order. Based on the
results of the analysis conducted in Part I of this study, instances of justification from other
textbooks were not found in the observed lessons. One teacher – Lena – occasionally used
other sources (e.g., other textbooks and worksheets), yet merely as a resource for additional
tasks and activities and not for justification of mathematical statements.
This great contribution of the textbook to shaping the paths of justification in class is in line
with the literature. Previous studies suggest that in many countries, textbooks serve an
important role in shaping students’ opportunities to learn mathematics (J. A. Newton, 2012;
Stein et al., 2007), and that teachers use textbooks as a main source for content and activities
to include in their lesson plans, and often follow teaching sequences suggested by textbooks
(Eisenmann & Even, 2009, 2011; Haggarty & Pepin, 2002).
However, as mentioned before, the textbook alone does not tell the entire story. As can be
expected, the classroom lessons were not an exact copy of the corresponding textbook
lessons, and for each teacher noteworthy differences were found between the justifications
offered in the textbook and in their classes. Most notable was the exclusion of instances of
deduction using a general case and those marked as intended for advanced students.
Instances of deduction using a general case were excluded from classes for which proof was
judged as unsuitable. The interviews suggested that the declared aim of the teachers in
teaching students to justify was to ensure that students would remember the studied topics.
Furthermore, Lena described justification as important yet not suitable for all students:
It depends on the kid's level. Some children are not ready, it does not matter whether you
explain to them – they will not understand. […] However, for those with [mathematical]
thinking, that they're good at it, it was important to me, yes, because then they know the
origin, the 'why', and then it is easier to remember the formula. They don't memorize.
This perception of justification led Lena to refrain from incorporating proof in her classes.
However, in the year of observations Lena taught in two classes with mixed levels of ability,
in which some students were considered high-achievers. As an interim solution, Lena's
advanced students were given the option to study geometry separately, in a small group with
a supporting teacher, focusing on proof and proving.
151 | Discussion
The absence of the type of justification closest to a formal proof may impede some students
from learning about the role and importance of proof in mathematics. On the other hand, this
absence is in accordance with the pre-deductive approach recommended for the 7th grade in
the Israeli curriculum.
The findings further suggest that instances of justification that were marked in the textbook as
intended for high-achieving students, were excluded from the paths of justification in the
observed classrooms. In the concluding teacher interview, Millie described certain instances
of justification as too difficult and discussed her belief in teaching all students in a similar
way, as basic as possible, regardless of their ability: "I like using the same methods. The way
I see it, any method that helps lower-track students can help those whose level is good and
even support them, so essentially I use the same teaching methods and materials."
Moreover, the exclusion of instances of justification that were marked as suitable for
mathematically-inclined students was related to the teacher's mathematical background. For
example, Millie commented about her lack of knowledge of the underlying reasoning for
several topics, such as the positive product of negative numbers, and claimed that certain
instances of justification (i.e., for the product of negatives and for area of a disk) were too
difficult. Furthermore, for two of the observed mathematical statements, despite the fact that
Millie followed the paths of justification offered in the textbook, she presented a flawed
inference process in both of her classes.
Additionally, the classroom atmosphere was instrumental in shaping the paths of justification.
For example, the flow of most of Lena's lessons was interrupted frequently for disciplinary
purposes in light of excessive noise and behavioural issues. These interruptions contributed to
shaping the paths of justification by cutting short several classroom discussions, some of
them pertaining to instances of justification. Specifically, a noisy classroom environment
contributed to altering a type of justification from deductive to empirical.
The contribution of the teacher and the students to shaping their opportunities to engage in
argumentative activities is documented in the literature (e.g., Ayalon & Even, 2016;
Eisenmann & Even, 2011; Even & Kvatinsky, 2009). The near-identical paths of justification
each teacher offered in her two classes, even when facing disparate student levels (i.e., low-
achieving students in one class and mainstream and high-achieving students in the other),
reflect an invariant teaching approach to justification. Ayalon and Even (2016) reported a
Discussion – Textbook, teacher, and students | 152
similar "fixed" approach to argumentation in a study that used a research design similar to the
design of Part II of this study ("Same teacher – different classrooms", Even, 2008, 2014).
9.3. Implications
The findings of this study have several practical and theoretical implications, which are
discussed in this section. Closing this section is a discussion of caveats and issues for future
research raised by the study.
9.3.1. Contribution to practice
This study focused on textbooks that were published in accordance to the current Israeli
junior high school mathematics curriculum, and are in use by in-service teachers. It brings to
light aspects regarding the justifications offered in the textbooks – both in the introductory
sections and the related collections of tasks. The study mapped the paths of justification and
characterized the justification strategies and types offered for the analyzed mathematical
statements. These aspects are nontrivial, and are the result of an in-depth textbook analysis.
Therefore, this study provides useful information to teachers and subject coordinators, for
deciding which textbook to choose and use in class.
Teachers can rely on this analysis to become acquainted with a multitude of justification
strategies, and construct paths of justification that include instances of justification that are
better suited for different types of learners, by catering to individual students' ways of
thinking. In addition, these paths can include the use of a certain justification strategy several
times, each using a different type of justification, to allow generalization of results and
promote understanding.
Additionally, this study might be of interest to textbook authors, in order to better understand
common principles which underlie Israeli 7th grade textbooks and the opportunities each
textbook provides for learning to explain and justify. Thus, future editions of their textbooks
might offer paths of justification inspired by this study.
This study provides detailed information for Israeli educators, curriculum developers, and
decision makers regarding the opportunities for justification that are offered in Israeli 7th
grade mathematics textbooks, both by topic (i.e., algebra and geometry) and by the intended
student population (i.e., students with low achievements and the general population). The
findings regarding the different distribution of types of justification in different topics and in
textbooks of different scope may raise points for discussion regarding the extent and the
desirability of these phenomena in mathematics education.
153 | Discussion
Furthermore, this study analyzed the ways in which the textbook, together with the teacher
and the students, contribute to the teaching of justification in class. The findings revealed that
instances of justification that were offered in the textbook were the main source for instances
of justification in the classroom, yet two kinds of instances were typically excluded: items
marked as suitable for high-achievers and/or of the type of justification closest to a formal
proof. This information can help facilitators design professional development courses that
focus on the instances of justification offered in different textbooks and on various paths of
justification that may be suitable in different classrooms.
9.3.2. Contribution to the research community
This comprehensive textbook analysis provides researchers in mathematics education with
ways of better understanding the opportunities offered for students to learn how to explain
and justify. It shows the great value in combining a framework that attends to meta-level
aspects with elements that attend to the justification strategy in each instance of justification.
This has the potential to improve research methods for future studies that analyze
mathematics textbooks or examine classroom instruction and student learning.
Three methodological notes are in order. First, this study shows that the conceptual
framework suggested by Stacey and Vincent (2009) provides valuable information about the
nature of justification, not only in textbooks but also in classrooms. Analysis by using this
framework revealed differences that were not visible when using the more general categories
described in Harel and Sowder's (2007) proof schemes. For example, it revealed differences
in the frequencies of the type of justification closest to a formal proof, both among textbooks
of different scopes and between the textbook and the observed classed. These differences
give merit to using a framework with a higher resolution and a wider scope in analysis of
explanations and justifications for mathematical statements.
A second note about methodology: In analysis of the part of the lesson in which instances of
justification were offered, the study showed that most of the justifications for the analysed
statements were included either in the introductory sections or in tasks intended for classroom
discussion. However, some instances of justification were embedded in tasks intended for
student individual or small-group work. While the inclusion of these instances did not affect
the emerging patterns, analyzing all parts of the lesson – both those intended for a whole
class grouping and those intended for individual student work – may provide a more
complete picture of the opportunities offered for students to learn how to justify.
Discussion – Implications | 154
A third note deals with the research design which was utilized in this study – "Same teacher –
different classrooms" (Even, 2008, 2014). This design is extremely useful because
implementation of curriculum materials is a dynamic process with several participants, and
isolating the contribution of each factor for shaping mathematics teaching and learning is not
possible (Lloyd, 1999). On the other hand, while the methodological choice to focus on two
case studies can provide rich and valuable data, it cannot lead to generalizations.
9.3.3. Caveats and opportunities for future research
In this study, analysis of the instances of justification focused on two characteristics –
justification strategies and types. These attributes shed light on important aspects of the paths
of justification regarding the reasoning involved for each mathematical statement. However,
these two attributes tell an incomplete story. One such missing aspect is the (possible)
intended purpose of each instance of justification – both in the textbook and in the classroom.
For example, some instances of justification may have served didactical purposes only (e.g.,
invoking students' intuition, or affirming the statement), or served as a precursor for
conjecture (e.g., an activity that aims at an identification of a pattern). Future research of
justification should take all three attributes into consideration – justification strategies and
types, and the intended purposes of the instances of justification.
Additionally, in my discussion of the findings in the textbooks I made certain assumptions
regarding the textbook authors' intentions, views, and opinions regarding justification. These
assumptions are merely educated speculation based on the results in the comparative analysis
of the paths of justification in the Israeli textbooks and of my review of the literature. In order
to gain a better understanding of the textbook authors' intentions, it is recommended to
present the authors with the findings of this study and interview each author.
In Part II of this study, I intended to compare paths of justification for certain mathematical
statements between teachers. This comparison involved limiting the analysis to mathematical
statements that were observed in all four classes. However, due to research constraints,
insufficient data were collected to enable a meaningful analysis. It is therefore recommended
to conduct additional classroom observations and to include more teachers in future studies.
Last, this study focused on 7th grade textbooks. As Thompson (2014) noted, similarities and
differences which were identified among textbooks for a particular grade level might change
in the course of that textbook series. Additional research is needed to characterize the paths of
justification in Israeli textbooks intended for higher grades.
155 | References
References
Adler, J., & Ronda, E. (2015). A framework for describing mathematics discourse in
instruction and interpreting differences in teaching. African Journal of Research in
Mathematics, Science and Technology Education, 19(3), 237–254.
Arcavi, A., & Bruckheimer, M. (1981). How shall we teach the multiplication of negative
numbers? Mathematics in School, 10(5), 31–33.
Arcavi, A., Drijvers, P., & Stacey, K. (2017). The Learning and Teaching of Algebra: Ideas,
Insights and Activities. New York, NY: Routledge.
Askey, R. (1999). Knowing and teaching elementary mathematics. American Educator,
23(3), 6–13.
Australian Education Council. (1991). A national statement on mathematics for Australian
schools. Melbourne: Curriculum Corporation.
Ayalon, M. (2011). Argumentation and school mathematics. PHD thesis, Weizmann Institute
of Science, Rehovot.
Ayalon, M., & Even, R. (2008). Deductive reasoning: In the eye of the beholder. Educational
Studies in Mathematics, 69(3), 235–247.
Ayalon, M., & Even, R. (2010). Mathematics Educators’ views on the role of mathematics
learning in developing deductive reasoning. International Journal of Science and
Mathematics Education, 8(6), 1131–1154.
Ayalon, M., & Even, R. (2015). Students’ opportunities to engage in transformational
algebraic activity in different beginning algebra topics and classes. International
Journal of Science and Mathematics Education, 13(2), 285–307.
Ayalon, M., & Even, R. (2016). Factors shaping students’ opportunities to engage in
argumentative activity. International Journal of Science and Mathematics Education,
14(3), 575–601.
Ayalon, T. (2012). Kfiza LaGova. Yavne: Bonus Books. (Hebrew).
Baker, S., Gersten, R., & Lee, D.-S. (2002). A synthesis of empirical research on teaching
mathematics to low-achieving students. The Elementary School Journal, 103(1), 51–
73.
Balacheff, N. (1988). Aspects of proof in pupils’ practice of school mathematics. In D. Pimm
(Ed.), Mathematics, teachers and children (pp. 216–235). Hodder & Stoughton:
Londres.
Balacheff, N. (1991). The benefits and limits of social interaction: The case of mathematical
proof. In A. Bishop, S. Mellin-Olsen, & J. van Dormolen (Eds.), Mathematical
knowledge: Its growth through teaching (pp. 175–192). Dordrecht, Netherlands:
Kluwer.
Balacheff, N. (2010). Bridging knowing and proving in mathematics: A didactical
perspective. In G. Hanna, H. N. Jahnke, & H. Pulte (Eds.), Explanation and Proof in
Mathematics (pp. 115–135). New York, NY: Springer.
Ball, D. L., & Bass, H. (2003). Making mathematics reasonable in school. In J. Kilpatrick, W.
G. Martin, & D. Shifter (Eds.), A research companion to the principles and standards
for school mathematics (pp. 27–44). Reston, VA: NCTM.
References | 156
Ball, D. L., Hoyles, C., Jahnke, H. N., & Movshovitz-Hadar, N. (2002). The teaching of
proof. In L. I. Tatsien (Ed.), Proccedings of the International Congress of
Mathematicians (Vol. II, pp. 907–920). Beijing: Higher Education Press.
Banegas, J. A. (2013). Argumentation in Mathematics. In A. Aberdein & I. J. Dove (Eds.),
The argument of mathematics. Dordrecht, Netherlands: Springer.
Bass, H., & Ball, D. L. (2014). Mathematics and education: Collaboration in practice. In M.
N. Fried & T. Dreyfus (Eds.), Mathematics & mathematics education: Searching for
common ground (pp. 299–312). Dordrecht, Netherlands: Springer.
Bell, A. W. (1976). A study of pupils’ proof-explanations in mathematical situations.
Educational Studies in Mathematics, 7(1), 23–40.
Bergwall, A., & Hemmi, K. (2017). The State of Proof in Finnish and Swedish Mathematics
Textbooks—Capturing Differences in Approaches to Upper-Secondary Integral
Calculus. Mathematical Thinking and Learning, 19(1), 1–18.
Bernard, J. E., & Cohen, M. P. (1988). An integration of equation solving methods into a
developmental learning sequence. The Ideas of Algebra, K-12, 97–111.
Bieda, K. N., Holden, C., & Knuth, E. J. (2006). Does proof prove? Students’ emerging
beliefs about generality and proof in middle school. In S. Alatorre, J. L. Cortina, M.
Sáiz, & A. Méndez (Eds.), Proceedings of the twenty-eighth annual meeting of the
North American chapter of the International Group for the Psychology of
Mathematics Education (Vol. 2, pp. 395–402). Mérida, México: Universidad
Pedagógica Nacional.
Bieda, K. N., Ji, X., Drwencke, J., & Picard, A. (2014). Reasoning-and-proving opportunities
in elementary mathematics textbooks. International Journal of Educational Research,
64, 71–80.
Bieda, K. N., & Lepak, J. (2012). Examples as Tools for Constructing Justifications.
Matheצatics Teaching in the Middle School, 17(9), 520–523.
Blum, W., & Kirsch, A. (1991). Preformal proving: Examples and reflections. Educational
Studies in Mathematics, 22(2), 183–203.
Borko, H., Peressini, D., Romagnano, L., Knuth, E. J., Willis-Yorker, C., Wooley, C., …
Masarik, K. (2000). Teacher Education Does Matter: A Situative View of Learning to
Teach Secondary Mathematics. Educational Psychologist, 35(3), 193–206.
Bouhadana, R., Goldenberg, G., Furman, T., Friedlander, A., Robinson, N., & Taizi, N.
(2014). Mathematica Meshulevet - Green. Rehovot: Weizmann Institute of Science,
Department of Science Teaching. (Hebrew).
Branford, B. (1908). A study of mathematical education: Including the teaching of arithmetic.
Oxford, Clarendon Press.
Brown, S. I. (1969). Signed numbers: A “product” of misconceptions. The Mathematics
Teacher, 62(3), 183–195.
Cabassut, R. (2005). Argumentation and proof in examples taken from French and German
textbooks. In M. Bosch (Ed.), Proceedings of the 4th congress of the European
Society for Research in Mathematics Education (CERME4) (pp. 391–400). Sant Feliu
de Guíxols, Spain.
Cable, J. (1971). The ground from which directed numbers grow. Mathematics in School,
1(1), 10–12.
157 | References
Cai, J., & Cirillo, M. (2014). What do we know about reasoning and proving? Opportunities
and missing opportunities from curriculum analyses. International Journal of
Educational Research, 64, 132–140.
Chazan, D. (1993). High school geometry students’ justification for their views of empirical
evidence and mathematical proof. Educational Studies in Mathematics, 24(4), 359–
387.
Chazan, D. (2000). Beyond formulas in mathematics and teaching: Dynamics of the high
school algebra classroom. New York, NY: Teachers College Press.
Chen, C. L., & Herbst, P. (2013). The interplay among gestures, discourse, and diagrams in
students’ geometrical reasoning. Educational Studies in Mathematics, 83(2), 285–307.
Chen, J. C. (2006). Investigating the Learning Expectations related to Grade 1-8 Geometry in
Some Asian Countries and US States. Taiwan Mathematics Teacher E-Journals, 5,
35–50.
Common Core State Standards Initiative. (2010). Common Core State Standards for
Mathematics (CCSSM). Washington, DC: National Governors Association Center for
Best Practices and the Council of Chief State School Officers.
Conner, A., Singletary, L. M., Smith, R. C., Wagner, P. A., & Francisco, R. T. (2014).
Identifying Kinds of Reasoning in Collective Argumentation. Mathematical Thinking
and Learning, 16(3), 181–200.
Crespo, S., & Nicol, C. (2006). Challenging preservice teachers’ mathematical
understanding: The case of division by zero. School Science and Mathematics, 106(2),
84–97.
Crowley, M. L., & Dunn, K. A. (1985). On multiplying negative numbers. The Mathematics
Teacher, 78(4), 252–256.
da Ponte, J. P. (2007). Investigations and explorations in the mathematics classroom. ZDM -
International Journal on Mathematics Education, 39(5), 419–430.
Davis, B., & Simmt, E. (2006). Mathematics-for-teaching: An ongoing investigation of the
mathematics that teachers (need to) know. Educational Studies in Mathematics, 61(3),
293–319.
Davis, J. D. (2009). Understanding the influence of two mathematics textbooks on
prospective secondary teachers’ knowledge. Journal of Mathematics Teacher
Education, 12(5), 365–389.
Davis, J. D. (2012). An examination of reasoning and proof opportunities in three differently
organized secondary mathematics textbook units. Mathematics Education Research
Journal, 24(4), 467–491.
Davis, J. D. (2013). Examining reasoning-and-proving in the treatment of complex numbers
in Irish secondary mathematics textbooks. Bulletin of the Irish Mathematical Society,
(71), 41–57.
Davis, J. D., Smith, D. O., Roy, A. R., & Bilgic, Y. K. (2014). Reasoning-and-proving in
algebra: The case of two reform-oriented US textbooks. International Journal of
Educational Research, 64, 92–106.
Davis, P. J., & Hersh, R. (1981). The mathematical experience. Boston: Birkhauser.
References | 158
Dawson, J. W. (2006). Why do mathematicians re-prove theorems? Philosophia
Mathematica, 14(3), 269–286.
Dawson, J. W. (2015). Why Prove it Again?: Alternative Proofs in Mathematical Practice.
Basel, Switzerland: Birkhäuser.
de Villiers, M. (1990). The role and function of proof in mathematics. Pythagoras, 23, 17–24.
Department of Education. (2010). National curriculum for mathematics (England): Key
stages 3 and 4 framework document. London: Department of Education, United
Kingdom.
Dickinson, P., & Eade, F. (2004). Using the number line to investigate the solving of linear
equations. For the Learning of Mathematics, 24(2), 41–47.
Ding, M., & Li, X. (2014). Transition from concrete to abstract representations: the
distributive property in a Chinese textbook series. Educational Studies in
Mathematics, 87(1), 103–121.
Dolev, S. (2011). Justifications and proofs of mathematical statements in 7th grade
textbooks. Rehovot: Weizmann Institute of Science.
Dolev, S., & Even, R. (2013). Justifications and explanations in Israeli 7th grade math
textbooks. International Journal of Science and Mathematics Education, 13(2), 309–
327.
Dreyfus, T. (1999). Why Johnny can’t prove. Educational Studies in Mathematics, 38(1–3),
85–109.
Dreyfus, T. (2000). Some views on proofs by teachers and mathematicians. In A. Gagatsis &
G. A. Makrides (Eds.), Proceedings of the 2nd Mediterranean conference on
mathematics education (Vol. I, pp. 11–25). Nikosia, Cyprus: The University of
Cyprus.
Dreyfus, T., & Hadas, N. (1996). Proof as answer to the question why. ZDM - International
Journal on Mathematics Education, 28(1), 1–5.
Dreyfus, T., Nardi, E., & Leikin, R. (2012). Forms of proof and proving in the classroom. In
G. Hanna & M. D. De Villiers (Eds.), Proof and Proving in Mathematics Education:
The 19th ICMI Study (Vol. 15) (pp. 191–213). Dordrecht, Netherlands: Springer.
Eisenmann, T., & Even, R. (2009). Similarities and differences in the types of algebraic
activities in two classes taught by the same teacher. In J. T. Remillard, B. A. Herbel-
Eisenmann, & G. M. Lloyd (Eds.), Mathematics teachers at work: Connecting
curriculum materials and classroom instruction (pp. 152–170). New York, NY:
Routledge.
Eisenmann, T., & Even, R. (2011). Enacted types of algebraic activity in different classes
taught by the same teacher. International Journal of Science and Mathematics
Education, 9(4), 867–891.
English, L. D. (1998). Reasoning by analogy in solving comparison problems. Mathematical
Cognition, 4(2), 125–146.
Even, R. (2008). Offering mathematics to learners in different classes of the same teacher. In
O. Figueras & A. Sepúlveda (Eds.), Proceedings of the Joint Meeting of the 32nd
Conference of the International Group for the Psychology of Mathematics Education,
and the XX North American Chapter (Vol. 1, pp. 51–66). Morelia, Michoacán,
México: PME.
159 | References
Even, R. (2014). The interplay of factors involved in shaping students’ opportunities to
engage in mathematics. In Y. Li, E. A. Silver, & S. Li (Eds.), Transforming
Mathematics Instruction: Multiple approaches and practices (pp. 459–474). London:
Springer.
Even, R., & Kvatinsky, T. (2009). Approaches to teaching mathematics in lower-achieving
classes. International Journal of Science and Mathematics Education, 7(5), 957–985.
Even, R., & Kvatinsky, T. (2010). What mathematics do teachers with contrasting teaching
approaches address in probability lessons? Educational Studies in Mathematics, 74,
207–222.
Eves, H. (1972). A survey of geometry. Boston: Allyn and Bacon.
Fan, L. (2013). Textbook research as scientific research: towards a common ground on issues
and methods of research on mathematics textbooks. ZDM - International Journal on
Mathematics Education, 45(5), 765–777.
Fan, L., Zhu, Y., & Miao, Z. (2013). Textbook research in mathematics education:
development status and directions. ZDM - International Journal on Mathematics
Education, 45(5), 633–646.
Filloy, E., & Rojano, T. (1989). Solving equations: The transition from arithmetic to algebra.
For the Learning of Mathematics, 9(2), 19–25.
Finnish National Board of Education. (2003). Lukion opetussuunnitelman perusteet 2003
(National core curriculum for upper secondary schools 2003)(Vammala: Vammalan
kirjapaino Oy). Retrieved March 2, 2017, from
http://www.oph.fi/download/47678_core_curricula_upper_secondary_education.pdf
Fujita, T., & Jones, K. (2014). Reasoning-and-proving in geometry in school mathematics
textbooks in Japan. International Journal of Educational Research, 64, 81–91.
Furinghetti, F., & Morselli, F. (2011). Beliefs and beyond: hows and whys in the teaching of
proof. ZDM - International Journal on Mathematics Education, 43(4), 587–599.
González, G., & Herbst, P. (2006). Competing arguments for the geometry course: Why were
American high school students supposed to study geometry in the twentieth century?
International Journal for the History of Mathematics Education, 1(1), 7–33.
Goodlad, J. I., Tye, K. A., & Klein, M. F. (1979). The domains of curriculum and their study.
In J. I. Goodlad (Ed.), Curriculum inquiry: The study of curriculum practice (pp. 43–
76). New York, NY: McGraw-Hill.
Haggarty, L., & Pepin, B. (2002). An investigation of mathematics textbooks and their use in
English, French and German classrooms: who gets an opportunity to learn what?
British Educational Research Journal, 28(4), 567–590.
Hanna, G. (1990). Some pedagogical aspects of proof. Interchange, 21(1), 6–13.
Hanna, G. (2000). Proof, explanation and exploration: An overview. Educational Studies in
Mathematics, 44(1–2), 5–23.
Hanna, G. (2014). Mathematical proof, argumentation, and reasoning. In S. Lerman (Ed.),
Encyclopedia of Mathematics Education (pp. 404–408). Dordrecht, Netherlands:
Springer.
Hanna, G., & de Bruyn, Y. (1999). Opportunity to learn proof in Ontario grade twelve
mathematics texts. Ontario Mathematics Gazette, 37, 23–29.
References | 160
Hanna, G., Jahnke, H. N., & Pulte, H. (Eds.). (2010). Explanation and Proof in Mathematics:
Philosophical and Educational Perspectives. New York, NY: Springer.
Harel, G., & Sowder, L. (1998). Students’ proof schemes: Results from exploratory studies.
In A. H. Schoenfeld, J. Kaput, & E. Dubinsky (Eds.), Issues in mathematics
education: Vol. 7. Research in Collegiate Mathematics Education III (pp. 234–283).
Providence, RI: Mathematical Association of America.
Harel, G., & Sowder, L. (2007). Toward comprehensive perspectives on the learning and
teaching of proof. In F. K. Lester (Ed.), Second handbook of research on mathematics
teaching and learning: A project of the National Council of Teachers of Mathematics
(pp. 805–842). Charlotte, NC: Information Age Publishing.
Harel, G., & Tall, D. (1991). The general, the abstract, and the generic in advanced
mathematics. For the Learning of Mathematics, 11(1), 38–42.
Healy, L., & Hoyles, C. (2000). A study of proof conceptions in algebra. Journal for
Research in Mathematics Education, 31(4), 396–428.
Hefendehl-Hebeker, L. (1991). Negative numbers: Obstacles in their evolution from intuitive
to intellectual constructs. For the Learning of Mathematics, 11(1), 26–32.
Hemmi, K., Lepik, M., & Viholainen, A. (2013). Analysing proof-related competences in
Estonian, Finnish and Swedish mathematics curricula—towards a framework of
developmental proof. Journal of Curriculum Studies, 45(3), 354–378.
https://doi.org/10.1080/00220272.2012.754055
Herbst, P., & Brach, C. (2006). Proving and doing proofs in high school geometry classes:
What is it that is going on for students? Cognition and Instruction, 24(1), 73–122.
Hershkovitz, S., & Gilad, S. (2012). Mathematica LeHatab. Tel Aviv: Center for Educational
Technology. (Hebrew).
Hirsch, C. R. (1974). Pick’s rule. The Mathematics Teacher, 67(5), 431–473.
Hoch, M., & Dreyfus, T. (2004). Structure sense in high school algebra: The effect of
brackets. In M. J. Høines & A. B. Funlestad (Eds.), Proceedings of the 28th
Conference of the International Group for the Psychology of Mathematics Education
(Vol. 3, pp. 49–56). Bergen, Norway: PME.
Hollingsworth, H., McCrae, B., & Lokan, J. (2003). Teaching mathematics in Australia:
Results from the TIMSS 1999 video study. Victoria, Australia: Australian Council for
Educational Research.
Hoosain, E. (2010). Teaching Areas of Polygons: An Alternative Approach. US-China
Education Review, 7(1), 38–41.
Host, E., Baynham, E., & McMaster, H. (2015). Using digital technology to see angles from
different angles: Part 2: Openings and turns. Australian Primary Mathematics
Classroom, 20(2), 3.
Howard, B. A. (1919). The Teaching of Geometry to First-Year Pupils. The Mathematical
Gazette, 9(139), 317–321.
Howson, G. (2013). The development of mathematics textbooks: historical reflections from a
personal perspective. ZDM - International Journal on Mathematics Education, 45(5),
647–658.
161 | References
Inglis, M., Mejia-Ramos, J. P., & Simpson, A. (2007). Modelling mathematical
argumentation: The importance of qualification. Educational Studies in Mathematics,
66(1), 3–21.
Israel Ministry of Education. (2009). Mathematics curriculum for grades 7-9. Jerusalem,
Israel: Author. (Hebrew).
Johnson-Laird, P. N. (1999). Deductive reasoning. Annual Review of Psychology, 50, 109–
135.
Jones, D. L., & Tarr, J. E. (2007). An examination of the levels of cognitive demand required
by probability tasks in middle grades mathematics textbooks. Statistics Education
Research Journal, 6(2), 4–27.
Jones, K., & Fujita, T. (2013). Interpretations of National Curricula: the case of geometry in
textbooks from England and Japan. ZDM - International Journal on Mathematics
Education, 45(5), 671–683.
Jones, K., Kunimune, S., Kumakura, H., Matsumoto, S., Fujita, T., Ding, L., … De Villiers,
M. (2009). Developing pedagogic approaches for proof: learning from teaching in the
East and West. In Fou-Lai Lin, Feng-Jui Hsieh, Gila Hanna, & Michael de Villiers
(Eds) (Vol. 1, pp. 232–237). Taipei, Taiwan: National Taiwan Normal University.
Kidron, I., & Dreyfus, T. (2009). Justification, enlightenment and the explanatory nature of
proof. In F. L. Lin, F. J. Hsieh, G. Hanna, & M. de Villiers (Eds.), Proceedings of the
ICMI study 19 conference: proof and proving in mathematics education (Vol. 1, pp.
244–249). Taipei, Taiwan: National Taiwan Normal University.
Kidron, I., & Dreyfus, T. (2010). Justification enlightenment and combining constructions of
knowledge. Educational Studies in Mathematics, 74, 75–93.
Kieran, C. (1992). The learning and teaching of algebra. In D. A. Grouws (Ed.), Handbook of
research on mathematics teaching and learning (pp. 390–419). New York, NY:
Macmillan Publishing Company.
Kieran, C. (2006). Research on the learning and teaching of algebra. In A. Gutiérrez & P.
Boero (Eds.), Handbook of research on the psychology of mathematics education:
Past, present and future (pp. 11–49). Rotterdam, Netherlands: Sense Publishers.
Kieran, C., & Sfard, A. (1999). Seeing through symbols: The case of equivalent expressions.
Focus on Learning Problems in Mathematics, 21(1), 1–17.
Kim, Y.-O. (2007). Explaining the Impossibility of Division by Zero: Approaches of Chinese
and Korean Middle School Mathematics Teachers. Research in Mathematical
Education, 11(1), 33–51.
Knifong, J. D., & Burton, G. M. (1980). Intuitive definitions for division with zero. The
Mathematics Teacher, 73(3), 179–186.
Knipping, C., & Reid, D. (2013). Revealing structures of argumentations in classroom
proving processes. In A. Aberdein & I. J. Dove (Eds.), The Argument of Mathematics
(pp. 119–146). Dordrecht, Netherlands: Springer.
Knuth, E. J. (2002). Secondary School Mathematics Teachers’ Conceptions of Proof. Journal
for Research in Mathematics Education, 33(5), 379–405.
Krummheuer, G. (1995). The ethnography of argumentation. In P. Cobb & H. Bauersfeld
(Eds.), The emergence of mathematical meaning: Interaction in classroom cultures
(pp. 229–269). Hillsdale, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, Inc.
References | 162
Lakatos, I. (1976). Proofs and refutations. The logic of mathematical discovery. Cambridge:
Cambridge University Press.
Lampert, M. (1986). Knowing, doing, and teaching multiplication. Cognition and Instruction,
3(4), 305–342.
Lampert, M. (1990). When the problem is not the question and the solution is not the answer:
Mathematical knowing and teaching. American Educational Research Journal, 27(1),
29–63.
Leikin, R. (2009). Exploring mathematical creativity using multiple solution tasks. In R.
Leikin, A. Berman, & B. Koichu (Eds.), Creativity in mathematics and the education
of gifted students (pp. 129–145). Rotterdam, Netherlands: Sense Publishers.
Leikin, R. (2014). Challenging mathematics with multiple solution tasks and mathematical
investigations in geometry. In Y. Li, E. A. Silver, & S. Li (Eds.), Transforming
Mathematics Instruction: Multiple approaches and practices (pp. 59–80). Dordrecht,
Netherlands: Springer.
Lester, F. K. (2005). On the theoretical, conceptual, and philosophical foundations for
research in mathematics education. ZDM - International Journal on Mathematics
Education, 37(6), 457–467.
Linchevski, L., & Herscovics, N. (1996). Crossing the cognitive gap between arithmetic and
algebra: Operating on the unknown in the context of equations. Educational Studies in
Mathematics, 30(1), 39–65.
Linchevski, L., & Livneh, D. (1999). Structure sense: The relationship between algebraic and
numerical contexts. Educational Studies in Mathematics, 40(2), 173–196.
Lloyd, G. M. (1999). Two teachers’ conceptions of a reform-oriented curriculum:
Implications for mathematics teacher development. Journal of Mathematics Teacher
Education, 2(3), 227–252.
Luria, A. R. (1976). Cognitive development: Its cultural and social foundations. Cambridge,
MA: Harvard university press.
Luzon, D., Amoyal, E., Cooperman, S., Bamberger, L., & Ginsburg, R. (2012). 10 BaRibua.
Jerusalem: Lambda. (Hebrew).
Mariotti, M. A. (2006). Proof and proving in mathematics education. In A. Gutierrez & P.
Boero (Eds.), Handbook of research on the psychology of mathematics education (pp.
173–203). Rotterdam, Netherlands: Sense Publishers.
Martin, W. G., & Harel, G. (1989). Proof frames of preservice elementary teachers. Journal
for Research in Mathematics Education, 20(1), 41–51.
McCrory, R., & Stylianides, A. J. (2014). Reasoning-and-proving in mathematics textbooks
for prospective elementary teachers. International Journal of Educational Research,
64, 119–131.
Mejia-Ramos, J. P., & Weber, K. (2014). Why and how mathematicians read proofs: further
evidence from a survey study. Educational Studies in Mathematics, 85, 161–173.
Mesa, V., & Griffiths, B. (2012). Textbook mediation of teaching: an example from tertiary
mathematics instructors. Educational Studies in Mathematics, 79, 85–107.
Metz, M. H. (1979). Classrooms and corridors: The crisis of authority in desegregated
secondary schools. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.
163 | References
Miyakawa, T. (2012). Proof in geometry: A comparative analysis of French and Japanese
textbooks. In T. Y. Tso (Ed.), Proceedings of the 36th conference of the International
Group for the Psychology of Mathematics Education (Vol. 3, pp. 225–232). Taipei,
Taiwan: PME.
Miyakawa, T. (2017). Comparative analysis on the nature of proof to be taught in geometry:
the cases of French and Japanese lower secondary schools. Educational Studies in
Mathematics, 94(1), 37–54. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10649-016-9711-x
Miyazaki, M. (2000). Levels of proof in lower secondary school mathematics as steps from
an inductive proof to an algebraic demonstration. Educational Studies in
Mathematics, 41, 47–68.
Moore, R. C. (2013). Measuring a Circle: A Math Lesson for Grades 5-10. The Journal of
Adventist Education, 75(4), 30–33.
NCTM - National Council of Teachers of Mathematics. (2000). Principles and standards for
school mathematics. Reston, VA: Author.
Nelsen, R. B. (1993). Proofs without words: Exercises in visual thinking. Washington, DC:
Mathematical Association of America.
Nelsen, R. B. (2000). Proofs without words II: More exercises in visual thinking.
Washington, DC: Mathematical Association of America.
Newton, D. P., & Newton, L. D. (2007). Could elementary mathematics textbooks help give
attention to reasons in the classroom? Educational Studies in Mathematics, 64(1), 69–
84.
Newton, J. A. (2012). Investigating the mathematical equivalence of written and enacted
middle school Standards-based curricula: Focus on rational numbers. International
Journal of Educational Research, 51–52, 66–85.
Nie, B., Freedman, T., Hwang, S., Wang, N., Moyer, J. C., & Cai, J. (2013). An investigation
of teachers’ intentions and reflections about using Standards-based and traditional
textbooks in the classroom. ZDM - International Journal on Mathematics Education,
45(5), 699–711.
Niv, I. (2011). Equivalent algebraic expressions in the 7th grade: Teaching approaches and
cognitive demands in three beginning algebra textbooks. Rehovot: MSc thesis,
Weizmann Institute of Science.
Nordström, K., & Löfwall, C. (2005). Proof in Swedish upper secondary school mathematics
textbooks - The issue of transparency. In M. Bosch (Ed.), Proceedings of the 4th
Congress of the European Society for Research in Mathematics Education (pp. 448–
457). Sant Feliu de Guixols, Spain: Universitat Ramon Llull.
Novotná, J., & Hoch, M. (2008). How structure sense for algebraic expressions or equations
is related to structure sense for abstract algebra. Mathematics Education Research
Journal, 20(2), 93–104.
Oakes, J. (1985). Keeping track: How schools structure inequality. New Haven, CT: Yale
University Press.
Olson, A. T. (1975). Mathematics through paper folding. Reston, VA: NCTM.
Otten, S., Gilbertson, N. J., Males, L. M., & Clark, D. L. (2014). The mathematical nature of
reasoning-and-proving opportunities in geometry textbooks. Mathematical Thinking
and Learning, 16(1), 51–79.
References | 164
Otten, S., Males, L., & Gilbertson, N. J. (2014). The introduction of proof in secondary
geometry textbooks. International Journal of Educational Research, 64, 107–118.
Ozrusso-Hagiag, G., Bouhadana, R., Hadas, N., Furman, T., Friedlander, A., Kiro, S., …
Taizi, N. (2012). Mathematica Meshulevet - Blue. Rehovot: Weizmann Institute of
Science, Department of Science Teaching. (Hebrew).
Page, R. N. (1991). Lower-Track Classrooms: A Curricular and Cultural Perspective. New
York, NY: Teachers College Press.
Peirce, C. S. (1998). Deduction, induction, and hypothesis. In M. R. Cohen (Ed.), Chance,
love, and logic: philosophical essays (pp. 131–153). Lincoln, NE: University of
Nebraska Press. (Original work published 1878)
Peterson, J. C. (1972). Fourteen different strategies for multiplication of integers or why
(−1).(−1)=+ 1. The Arithmetic Teacher, 19(5), 396–403.
Peterson, L. L., & Saul, M. E. (1990). Seven ways to find the area of a trapezoid. The
Mathematics Teacher, 83(4), 283–286.
Piaget, J. (1964). Part I: Cognitive development in children: Piaget development and learning.
Journal of Research in Science Teaching, 2(3), 176–186.
Pólya, G. (1954). Mathematics and plausible reasoning - Volume 1: Induction and analogy in
mathematics. London: Oxford University Press.
Polya, G. (1973). How to solve it: A new aspect of mathematical method. Princeton, NJ:
Princeton university press. (Original work published 1945)
Prusak, N., Hershkowitz, R., & Schwarz, B. B. (2012). From visual reasoning to logical
necessity through argumentative design. Educational Studies in Mathematics, 79(1),
19–40.
Rapke, T. (2008). Thoughts on Why (-1)(-1)=+ 1. Mathematics Teacher, 102(5), 374–376.
Raudenbush, S. W., Rowan, B., & Cheong, Y. F. (1993). Higher order instructional goals in
secondary schools: Class, teacher, and school influences. American Educational
Research Journal, 30(3), 523–553.
Rav, Y. (1999). Why do we prove theorems? Philosophia Mathematica, 7(1), 5–41.
Reid, D. A. (1997). Constraints and opportunities in teaching proving. In E. Pehkonen (Ed.),
Proceedings of the 21st Conference of the International Group for the Psychology of
Mathematics Education (Vol. 4, pp. 49–55). Lahti, Finland: PME.
Reid, D. A. (2005). The meaning of proof in mathematics education. In M. Bosch (Ed.),
Proceedings of the 4th Conference of the European Society for Research in
Mathematics Education (pp. 458–468). Sant Feliu de Guixols, Spain: Universitat
Ramon Llull.
Reid, D. A., & Knipping, C. (2010). Proof in mathematics education: Research, learning,
and teaching. Rotterdam, Netherlands: Sense Publishers.
Reiss, K., & Renkl, A. (2002). Learning to prove: The idea of heuristic examples. ZDM -
International Journal on Mathematics Education, 34(1), 29–35.
Remillard, J. T. (2009). Considering what we know about the relationship between teachers
and curriculum materials. In J. T. Remillard, B. Herbel-Eisenmann, & G. Lloyd
(Eds.), Mathematics teachers at work (pp. 85–92). New York, NY: Routledge.
165 | References
Remillard, J. T. (2012). Modes of engagement: Understanding teachers’ transactions with
mathematics curriculum resources. In G. Gueudet, B. Pepin, & L. Trouche (Eds.),
From Text to “Lived” Resources (pp. 105–122). Dordrecht, Netherlands: Springer.
Rezat, S. (2012). Interactions of teachers’ and students’ use of mathematics textbooks. In G.
Gueudet, B. Pepin, & L. Trouche (Eds.), From Text to “Lived” Resources (pp. 231–
245). Dordrecht, Netherlands: Springer.
Ronda, E., & Adler, J. (2017). Mining Mathematics in Textbook Lessons. International
Journal of Science and Mathematics Education, 15(6), 1097–1114.
Rott, B., Leuders, T., & Stahl, E. (2015). Epistemological Judgments in Mathematics: an
Interview Study Regarding the Certainty of Mathematical Knowledge. In C. Bernack-
Schüler, R. Erens, A. Eichler, & T. Leuders (Eds.), Views and Beliefs in Mathematics
Education (pp. 227–238). Wiesbaden: Springer.
Sabar Ben-Yehoshua, N. (Ed.). (2001). Qualitative research: Genres and traditions in
qualitative research. Tel Aviv, Israel: Zmora Bitan. (Hebrew).
Schmidt, W. H., Jorde, D., Cogan, L. S., Barrier, E., Gonzalo, I., Moser, U., … Wolfe, R. G.
(1996). Characterizing pedagogical flow: An investigation of mathematics and
science teaching in six countries. Dordrecht, Netherlands: Kluwer.
Schoenfeld, A. H. (1985). Mathematical problem solving. Orlando: Academic Press.
Schoenfeld, A. H. (1992). Learning to think mathematically: Problem solving, metacognition,
and sense making in mathematics. Handbook of Research on Mathematics Teaching
and Learning, 334–370.
Schwarz, B. B. (2009). Argumentation and learning. In N. Muller-Mirza & A. N. Perret-
Clermont (Eds.), Argumentation and education: Theoretical foundations and
practices (pp. 91–126). New York, NY: Springer.
Schwarz, B. B., Hershkowitz, R., & Prusak, N. (2010). Argumentation and mathematics. In
C. Howe & K. Littleton (Eds.), Educational dialogues: Understanding and promoting
productive interaction (pp. 115–141). London: Routledge.
Sears, R., & Chávez, Ó. (2014). Opportunities to engage with proof: the nature of proof tasks
in two geometry textbooks and its influence on enacted lessons. ZDM - International
Journal on Mathematics Education, 46(5), 767–780.
Selden, A., & Selden, J. (2008). Overcoming students’ difficulties in learning to understand
and construct proofs. In M. P. Carlson & C. Rasmussen (Eds.), Making the
connection: Research and teaching in undergraduate mathematics education (pp. 95–
110). Washington, DC: MAA.
Senk, S. L. (1985). How well do students write geometry proofs? The Mathematics Teacher,
78(6), 448–456.
Senk, S. L., Thompson, D. R., & Johnson, G. (2008). Reasoning and proof in high school
textbooks from the USA. In 11th International Congress on Mathematics Education.
Monterey, Mexico.
Sfard, A. (1995). The development of algebra: Confronting historical and psychological
perspectives. The Journal of Mathematical Behavior, 14(1), 15–39.
Sfard, A. (2000). On reform movement and the limits of mathematical discourse.
Mathematical Thinking and Learning, 2(3), 157–189.
References | 166
Shalev, Y., & Ozeri, E. (2012). Zameret - Mathematica LeKita 7. Ashdod: Loni Cohen
Books. (Hebrew).
Sherin, M. G. (2002). A balancing act: Developing a discourse community in a mathematics
classroom. Journal of Mathematics Teacher Education, 5(3), 205–233.
Shield, M., & Dole, S. (2013). Assessing the potential of mathematics textbooks to promote
deep learning. Educational Studies in Mathematics, 82(2), 183–199.
Sidenvall, J., Lithner, J., & Jäder, J. (2015). Students’ reasoning in mathematics textbook
task-solving. International Journal of Mathematical Education in Science and
Technology, 46(4), 533–552.
Sierpinska, A. (1994). Understanding in Mathematics. London: The Falmer Press.
Sigler, A., Segal, R., & Stupel, M. (2016). The standard proof, the elegant proof, and the
proof without words of tasks in geometry, and their dynamic investigation.
International Journal of Mathematical Education in Science and Technology, 47(8),
1226–1243.
Simpson, A. (2015). The anatomy of a mathematical proof: Implications for analyses with
Toulmin’s scheme. Educational Studies in Mathematics, 90(1), 1–17.
Siu, M.-K. (2008). Proof as a practice of mathematical pursuit in a cultural, socio-political
and intellectual context. ZDM - International Journal on Mathematics Education,
40(3), 355–361. https://doi.org/10.1007/s11858-008-0087-y
Son, J.-W., & Senk, S. L. (2010). How reform curricula in the USA and Korea present
multiplication and division of fractions. Educational Studies in Mathematics, 74(2),
117–142. https://doi.org/10.1007/s10649-010-9229-6
Sriraman, B., & Umland, K. (2014). Argumentation in mathematics education. In S. Lerman
(Ed.), Encyclopedia of Mathematics Education (pp. 46–48). Dordrecht, Netherlands:
Springer.
Stacey, K., & Vincent, J. (2009). Modes of reasoning in explanations in Australian eighth-
grade mathematics textbooks. Educational Studies in Mathematics, 72(3), 271–288.
Stein, M. K., Remillard, J. T., & Smith, M. S. (2007). How Curriculum Influences Student
Learning. In F. K. Lester (Ed.), Second Handbook of Research on Mathematics
Teaching and Learning (pp. 319–369). Charlotte, NC: Information Age Publishing.
Stylianides, G. J. (2008a). An analytic framework of reasoning-and-proving. For the
Learning of Mathematics, 28(1), 9–16.
Stylianides, G. J. (2008b). Investigating the guidance offered to teachers in curriculum
materials: The case of proof in mathematics. International Journal of Science and
Mathematics Education, 6(1), 191–215.
Stylianides, G. J. (2009). Reasoning-and-proving in school mathematics textbooks.
Mathematical Thinking and Learning, 11(4), 258–288.
Stylianides, G. J. (2014). Textbook analyses on reasoning-and-proving: Significance and
methodological challenges. International Journal of Educational Research, 64, 63–
70.
Sun, Y., & Kulm, G. (2010). A Comparison of US and Chinese Middle Grades Textbook
Development of Fraction Concepts. The Mathematics Educator, 12(2), 51–62.
167 | References
Swedish National Agency for Education. (2011). Ämnesplaner i matematik. (Mathematics
upper secondary syllabi). Retrieved March 2, 2017, from
https://www.skolverket.se/om-skolverket/publikationer/visa-enskild-
publikation?_xurl_=http://www5.skolverket.se/wtpub/ws/skolbok/wpubext/trycksak/
Blob/pdf2975.pdf?k=2975
Tabach, M., & Friedlander, A. (2008). The role of context in learning beginning algebra. In
C. E. Greenes & R. N. P. Rubenstein (Eds.), Algebra and algebraic thinking in school
mathematics: Seventieth Yearbook (pp. 223–232). Reston, VA: NCTM.
Tabach, M., Hershkowitz, R., & Dreyfus, T. (2013). Learning beginning algebra in a
computer-intensive environment. ZDM - International Journal on Mathematics
Education, 45(3), 377–391.
Tall, D. (2014). Making sense of mathematical reasoning and proof. In M. N. Fried & T.
Dreyfus (Eds.), Mathematics & Mathematics Education: Searching for Common
Ground (pp. 223–235). Dordrecht, Netherlands: Springer.
Tall, D., Yevdokimov, O., Koichu, B., Whiteley, W., Kondratieva, M., & Cheng, Y.-H.
(2012). Cognitive development of proof. In G. Hanna & M. de Villiers (Eds.), Proof
and Proving in Mathematics Education: The 19th ICMI Study (Vol. 15) (pp. 13–49).
Dordrecht, Netherlands: Springer.
Tarr, J. E., Reys, R. E., Reys, B. J., Chávez, Ó., Shih, J., & Osterlind, S. J. (2008). The
impact of middle-grades mathematics curricula and the classroom learning
environment on student achievement. Journal for Research in Mathematics
Education, 39(3), 247–280.
Thompson, D. R. (2014). Reasoning-and-proving in the written curriculum: Lessons and
implications for teachers, curriculum designers, and researchers. International
Journal of Educational Research, 64, 141–148.
Thompson, D. R., & Senk, S. L. (2014). The same geometry textbook does not mean the
same classroom enactment. ZDM - International Journal on Mathematics Education,
46(5), 781–795.
Thompson, D. R., Senk, S. L., & Johnson, G. J. (2012). Opportunities to learn reasoning and
proof in high school mathematics textbooks. Journal for Research in Mathematics
Education, 43(3), 253–295.
Tirosh, D., Even, R., & Robinson, N. (1998). Simplifying algebraic expressions: Teacher
awareness and teaching approaches. Educational Studies in Mathematics, 35(1), 51–
64.
Toulmin, S. E. (2003). The Uses of Argument (updated edition). New York, NY: Cambridge
University Press. (Original work published 1958)
Trgalová, J., & Jahn, A. P. (2013). Quality issue in the design and use of resources by
mathematics teachers. ZDM - International Journal on Mathematics Education, 45(7),
973–986.
Triantafillou, C., Spiliotopoulou, V., & Potari, D. (2016). The Nature of Argumentation in
School Mathematics and Physics Texts: The Case of Periodicity. International
Journal of Science and Mathematics Education, 14(4), 681–699.
Tsamir, P., & Sheffer, R. (2000). Concrete and formal arguments: The case of division by
zero. Mathematics Education Research Journal, 12(2), 92–106.
References | 168
Tsamir, P., Tirosh, D., Dreyfus, T., Barkai, R., & Tabach, M. (2009). Should proof be
minimal? Ms T’s evaluation of secondary school students’ proofs. The Journal of
Mathematical Behavior, 28(1), 58–67. https://doi.org/10.1016/j.jmathb.2009.04.002
Umland, K., & Sriraman, B. (2014). Argumentation in mathematics. In S. Lerman (Ed.),
Encyclopedia of mathematics education (pp. 44–46). Dordrecht, Netherlands:
Springer.
Usiskin, Z. (2013). Studying textbooks in an information age - a United States perspective.
ZDM - International Journal on Mathematics Education, 45(5), 713–723.
Usnick, V. E., Lamphere, P. M., & Bright, G. W. (1992). A generalized area formula. The
Mathematics Teacher, 85(9), 752–754.
Valverde, G. A., Bianchi, L., Wolfe, R. G., Schmidt, W., & Houang, R. (2002). According to
the Book. Using TIMSS to Investigate the Translation of Policy into Practice through
the World of Textbooks.
Van den Heuvel-Panhuizen, M. (2000). Mathematics education in the Netherlands: A guided
tour. In Freudenthal Institute CD-rom for ICME9 (pp. 1–32). Utrecht: Utrecht
University.
Van Eemeren, F. H., & Grootendorst, R. F. (2004). A systematic theory of argumentation:
The pragma-dialectical approach. Cambridge, England: Cambridge University Press.
van Eemeren, F. H., Grootendorst, R. F., & Henkemans, F. S. (1996). Fundamentals of
argumentation theory: A handbook of historical backgrounds and contemporary
applications. Mahwah, NJ: Lawrence Erlbaum Associates, Inc.
Verzosa, D., Guzon, A. F., & De las peñas, M. L. A. N. (2014). Using dynamic tools to
develop an understanding of the fundamental ideas of calculus. International Journal
of Mathematical Education in Science and Technology, 45(2), 190–199.
Vlassis, J. (2002). The balance model: Hindrance or support for the solving of linear
equations with one unknown. Educational Studies in Mathematics, 49(3), 341–359.
Watson, A. (2008). School Mathematics as a Special Kind of Mathematics. For the Learning
of Mathematics, 28(3), 3–7.
Watson, J. M. (1991). Models to show the impossibility of division by zero. School Science
and Mathematics, 91(8), 373–376.
Weaver, J. L., & Quinn, R. J. (1999). Geometer’s sketchpad in secondary geometry.
Computers in the Schools, 15(2), 83–95.
Weber, K. (2001). Student difficulty in constructing proofs: The need for strategic
knowledge. Educational Studies in Mathematics, 48(1), 101–119.
Weber, K. (2004). A framework for describing the processes that undergraduates use to
construct proofs. In M. J. Hoines & Fuglestad (Eds.), Proceedings of the 28th
Conference of the International Group for the Psychology of Mathematics Education
(Vol. 4, pp. 425–432). Bergen, Norway: PME.
Weber, K. (2008). How mathematicians determine if an argument is a valid proof. Journal
for Research in Mathematics Education, 39(4), 431–459.
Weber, K. (2014). Reflections on justification and proof. In M. N. Fried & T. Dreyfus (Eds.),
Mathematics & mathematics education: Searching for common ground (pp. 237–
257). Dordrecht, Netherlands: Springer.
169 | References
Weber, K., & Mejia-Ramos, J. P. (2011). Why and how mathematicians read proofs: an
exploratory study. Educational Studies in Mathematics, 76(3), 329–344.
Weinberg, A., Fukawa-Connelly, T., & Wiesner, E. (2015). Characterizing instructor gestures
in a lecture in a proof-based mathematics class. Educational Studies in Mathematics,
90(3), 233–258.
Werndl, C. (2009). Justifying definitions in mathematics—going beyond Lakatos.
Philosophia Mathematica, 17(3), 313–340.
Wiliam, D. (1998). What makes an investigation difficult? The Journal of Mathematical
Behavior, 17(3), 329–353.
Wilkerson-Jerde, M. H., & Wilensky, U. J. (2011). How do mathematicians learn math?:
resources and acts for constructing and understanding mathematics. Educational
Studies in Mathematics, 78(1), 21.
Wood, T. (1999). Creating a context for argument in mathematics class. Journal for Research
in Mathematics Education, 30(2), 171–191.
Wu, H. (1999). Basic skills versus conceptual understanding. American Educator, 23(3), 14–
19.
Xu, B. (2013). The development of school mathematics textbooks in China since 1950. ZDM
- International Journal on Mathematics Education, 45(5), 725–736.
Yackel, E. (2002). What we can learn from analyzing the teacher’s role in collective
argumentation. The Journal of Mathematical Behavior, 21(4), 423–440.
Yackel, E., & Cobb, P. (1996). Sociomathematical norms, argumentation, and autonomy in
mathematics. Journal for Research in Mathematics Education, 27(4), 458–477.
Yackel, E., & Hanna, G. (2003). Reasoning and proof. In J. Kilpatrick, W. G. Martin, & D.
Schifter (Eds.), A research companion to Principles and Standards for School
Mathematics (pp. 227–236). Reston, VA: NCTM.
Yekuel, G., & Bloomenkrantz, R. (2012). Mathematica LeKita 7. Kiriyat Tivon: Mishbetzet.
(Hebrew).
Yerushalmy, M., & Chazan, D. (1987). Effective problem posing in an inquiry environment:
A case study using the geometric supposer. In J. C. Bergeron, N. Herscovics, & C.
Kieran (Eds.), Proceedings of the 11th Conference of the International Group for the
Psychology of Mathematics Education (Vol. II, pp. 53–59). Montreal, Canada: PME.
Yopp, D. A., & Ely, R. (2016). When does an argument use a generic example? Educational
Studies in Mathematics, 91(1), 37–53.
Zaslavsky, O., Linchevsky, L., Ayalon, T., Buchbinder, O., Goorevich, I., Zodik, I., … Ron,
G. (2012). Efshar Gam Aheret. Yavne: Bonus Books. (Hebrew).
Zaslavsky, O., Nickerson, S. D., Stylianides, A. J., Kidron, I., & Winicki-Landman, G.
(2012). The need for proof and proving: mathematical and pedagogical perspectives.
In G. Hanna & M. D. De Villiers (Eds.), Proof and Proving in Mathematics
Education: The 19th ICMI Study (Vol. 15) (pp. 215–229). Dordrecht, Netherlands:
Springer.
Zazkis, D., Weber, K., & Mejía-Ramos, J. P. (2016). Bridging the gap between graphical
arguments and verbal-symbolic proofs in a real analysis context. Educational Studies
in Mathematics, 93(2), 155–173.
References | 170
Ziebarth, S. W., Hart, E. W., Marcus, R., Ritsema, B., Schoen, H. L., & Walker, R. (2009).
High school teachers as negotiators between curriculum intentions and enactment. In
J. T. Remillard, B. A. Herbel-Eisenmann, & G. M. Lloyd (Eds.), Mathematics
Teachers at Work: Connecting curriculum materials and classroom instruction (pp.
171–189). New York, NY: Routledge.
Zodik, I., & Zaslavsky, O. (2008). Characteristics of teachers’ choice of examples in and for
the mathematics classroom. Educational Studies in Mathematics, 69(2), 165–182.
Zohar, A., Degani, A., & Vaaknin, E. (2001). Teachers’ beliefs about low-achieving students
and higher order thinking. Teaching and Teacher Education, 17(4), 469–485.
Zohar, A., & Dori, Y. J. (2003). Higher order thinking skills and low-achieving students: Are
they mutually exclusive? The Journal of the Learning Sciences, 12(2), 145–181.
Zwetzschler, L., & Prediger, S. (2013). Conceptual challenges for understanding the
equivalence of expressions - a case study. In B. Ubuz, Ç. Haser, & M. A. Mariotti
(Eds.), Proceedings of the 8th Congress of the European Society for Research in
Mathematics Education (pp. 558–567). Antalya, Turkey: METU University Ankara.
171 | References
The analyzed textbooks
-מתמטיקה משולבת (. 2102תעיזי, נ. )… ג., בוהדנה, ר., הדס, נ., פורמן, ט., פרידלנדר, א., קירו, ש., ’, ג’חג-אוזרוסו
.. רחובות: מכון ויצמן למדע, המחלקה להוראת המדעיםמסלול כחול
.. יבנה: כ. בונוס הפצות בע"מקפ"ל -קפיצה לגובה (. 2102אילון, ט. )
. מסלול ירוק -מתמטיקה משולבת (. 2104, ט., פרידלנדר, א., רובינזון, נ., & תעיזי, נ. )בוהדנה, ר., גולדנברג, ג., פורמן
.רחובות: מכון ויצמן למדע, המחלקה להוראת המדעים
.המרכז לטכנולוגיה חינוכית -. תל אביב: מטח מתמטיקה לחטיבת הביניים(. 2102הרשקוביץ, ש., & גלעד, ש. )
. יבנה: כ. אפשר גם אחרת(. 2102רון, ג. )… בסקי, ל., אילון, ט., בוכבינדר, א., גורביץ, א., זודיק, א., ’זסלבסקי, א., לינצ
.בונוס הפצות בע"מ
.. קרית טבעון: משבצת’מתמטיקה לכיתה ז(. 2102יקואל, ג., & בלומנקרנץ, ר. )
. ירושלים: למדא יוזמות חינוכיות עשר בריבוע(. 2102גינזברג, ר. ) לוזון, ד., אמויאל, א., קופרמן, ש., במברגר, ל., &
.בע"מ
.. אשדוד: לוני כהן בע"ממתמטיקה לכיתה ז -צמרת (. 2102שלו, י., & עוזרי, א. )
Appendix – Interview items | 172
Appendix – Interview items
שאלות לראיון - לנה
דקות( 5-3) חלק א': רקע
כיתות וזה היה מאד מעניין. אני רוצה היום לשאול אותך על תיבמהלך השנה האחרונה ישבתי אצלך בשיעורים בש
כמה דברים שמעניינים אותי במיוחד, אבל לפני כן אשמח קודם כל להשלים כמה פרטים:
אילו תארים/תעודות יש לך? –בחינת השכלה מ א. .1
איפה למדת ומתי? ב.
איך הגעת להיות מורה למתמטיקה? ג.
?לימדת עד כה רמות לימודכיתות ובאילו באילו -מבחינת ניסיון בהוראה א. .2
אילו כיתות ואילו רמות את בדרך כלל מלמדת? ב.
?עד כה ימדתהתלמידים שלמאיזה רקע סוציואקונומי היו ג.
דקות( 22-51) מורה, כיתה, וספר לימוד –חלק ב'
במהלך השנה לימדת בשתי כיתות ז' במקביל. תוכלי לספר לי מה היה דומה ומה שונה בללמד בשתי א. .3
הכיתות?
איך היה ללמד בשתי הכיתות בשיעורים שבהם יצאו תלמידים אל רון או אירנה? ב.
חלטתם כמה ואילו תלמידים להוציא?הלפי מה ג.
איך את מתכננת את השיעורים שלך? למשל, האם ואיך את נעזרת בספר הלימוד, במקורות אחרים, א. .1
בצוות בית הספר, במדריכה, וכדומה?
(?2: האם השתמשת בספר הלימוד? איך... )התייחסה לספר הלימודלא אם ( 1) ב.
תוכלי לתת דוגמה? ?כשבנית את השיעור ספר הלימודהשתמשת ביך א הלימוד:( אם התייחסה לספר 2)
(?2: האם השתמשת במקורות נוספים מעבר לספר? איך... )מקורות נוספיםל( אם לא התייחסה 1) ג.
אפשר דוגמא? רות נוספים מעבר לספר הלימוד?השתמשת במקו איך :( אם התייחסה למקורות נוספים2)
(?2: האם העבודה עם צוות ביה"ס השפיעה על התכנון? איך... )התייחסה לאנשים אחריםלא אם ( 1) ד.
ך העבודה עם כל אחד השפיעה על תכנון השיעורים? תוכלי להדגים?אי :( אם התייחסה לאחרים2)
דוגמא? אפשרזה השפיע על תכנון השיעור בכיתה האחרת? האםשהעברת שיעור מסוים בכיתה אחת, אחרי .5
173 | Appendix – Interview items
[דקות לכל שאלה 7-כדקות: 12] חלק ג': מהלכי ההצדקה
גם הסברים פרונטליים וגם הסברים במשימות –אני רוצה עכשיו לעבור ולהתמקד בהסברים שניתנים בכיתה ז'
לתלמידים.
למשל, שזוויות מתאימות בין מקבילים שוות זו לזו –דברים למההאם לדעתך צריך להראות בכיתה ז' א. .6
דברים כאלה הם נכונים? למההאם חשוב להסביר –
?למה דברים הם נכונים למה חשוב להראות בכיתה ז' ב.
האם יש מקרים שבהם אין צורך, או לא כדאי להסביר? אפשר דוגמא? ג.
בכיתות גבוהות?צריך להסביר באותו אופן כמו כיתה ז' האם ב ד.
חלק מהנושאים שנלמדים בכיתה ז' מוכרים לתלמידים מביה"ס היסודי, למשל שאסור לחלק באפס, או א. .7
הדברים שהם למדו ביסודי הם למהראות לתלמידים כמה חשוב בעינייך להעד הנוסחה לשטח עיגול.
נכונים?
ב. האם נדרש סוג שונה של הסברים ביסודי ובחטיבת הביניים? : אם חשוב
תוכלי לפרט מדוע חשוב להראות זאת בכיתה ז'? אפשר דוגמא? .ג
ד. האם יש מקרים שבהם לא צריך להראות למה דברים מהיסודי נכונים? למה זה לא חשוב?
? האם תוכלי להרחיב? סביר למה הדברים נכוניםחשוב לה: ב. באילו מקרים אם תלוי בנושא
לא חשוב?זה ? מדוע סבירמתי לא חשוב לה. ג
: ב. תוכלי לפרט מדוע?אם לא חשוב
.שמוע ממך קצת לגביהםלאני אשמח ה מהנושאים שלימדת השנה, ושלושלדבר בצורה ספציפית על עכשיו עבור נ
נתחיל בזוויות קודקודיות. .9
מורות לגבי האם ואיך להראות למה זוויות קודקודיות שוות זו לזו. אלו במסגרת המחקר יצא לי לדבר עם
חלק מהתשובות שקיבלתי )לעבור לדף רלוונטי(
.כפל מספרים מכווניםנעבור ל .4
גם כאן, אשמח שנעבור על כמה תשובות שקיבלתי לגבי האם ואיך להראות למה מספר שלילי כפול מספר
רלוונטי(שלילי זה מספר חיובי )לעבור לדף
.שטח עיגולהנוסחה להנושא האחרון שבו אני רוצה להתמקד הוא .12
הנוסחה למה שוב, אשמח אם נוכל לעבור על כמה תשובות שקיבלתי ממורות לגבי האם ואיך להראות
)לעבור לדף רלוונטי(2rהיא rלשטח עיגול שרדיוסו
בחלק מההסברים שעליהם עברנו ראינו שהמורה הביאה את הכלל בסוף ההסבר, לפעמים באמצעו, ולפעמים .11
)האם תוכלי להרחיב? במה זה ?. מה לדעתך עדיףאותו המקיואז נ –אולי כהשערה – את הכלל ההציג
תלוי? האם תוכלי להדגים?(
תודה רבה! לספר לי?האם יש עוד משהו שהיית רוצה פחות או יותר סיימנו. .12
Appendix – Interview items | 174
נתחיל בזוויות קודקודיות.. 8
. אלו חלק למה זוויות קודקודיות שוות זו לזויצא לי לדבר עם מורות לגבי האם ואיך להראות במסגרת המחקר
:מהתשובות שקיבלתי
:מורה א'
I אני בדרך כלל מתחילה עם .
דוגמה מספרית:עבודה בכיתה על
II אותיות:. ואחר כך עובדים עם III ואז אני נותנת את הכלל .
כמסקנה:
מדוע .,חשבו את גודלן של
הן שוות?
אילו זוויות הן קודקודיות? מדוע הן
ת?ושו
מסקנה: זוויות קודקודיות שוות זו
לזו.
:מורה ב'
I .:אני קודם כל נותנת את הכלל II:ואז מתחילה בעבודה עם אותיות . III עבודה בכיתה על . ורק אחר כך
דוגמה מספרית:
זוויות קודקודיות שוות זו לזו.
אילו זוויות הן קודקודיות? מדוע
הן שוות?
.ושל חשבו את גודלן של
מדוע הן שוות?
:מורה ג'
I אני נותנת לתלמידים למדוד .
:זווית-זוויות עם מד
II:ואז נותנת את הכלל כמסקנה .
אילו הן? האם קיבלתם זוויות שוות?
שוות זו מסקנה: זוויות קודקודיות
.לזו
מוצא חן בעינייך אצל כל מורה, ומה את לא אוהבת?מה .א
נסי לבנות את המהלך האולטימטיבי מבחינתך כדי להסביר למה זוויות קודקודיות שוות זו לזו. .ב
את יכולה להעזר בהסברים שנתנו המורות, לשנות בהם מה שאת רוצה, או להוסיף משל עצמך.
זה שהצעת עובד בכיתה?איך מהלך כמו .ג
175 | Appendix – Interview items
. כפל מספרים מכוונים. נעבור ל4
למה מספר שלילי כפול מספר גם כאן, אשמח שנעבור על כמה תשובות שקיבלתי לגבי האם ואיך להראות
:שלילי זה מספר חיובי
:מורה ד'
I אני משלימה עם התלמידים לוח כפל .
של מספרים מכוונים, לפי חוקיות
בשורות ובעמודות:
II. אחר כך אני
אומרת שמתוך לוח
הכפל עולה השערה:
III:ואז רושמת על הלוח חישוב בשלבים .
השערה:
שלילי כפול
שלילי =
.מספר חיובי
)סכום נגדיים = אפס( 3 4 4 0
)לפי חוק הפילוג( 3 4 3 4 0
)פתיחת סוגריים( 3 4 12 0
)סכום נגדיים = אפס( 3 4 12
:מורה ה'
I כל ה"הסברים" שאני מכירה לכלל .
הזה הם לא מספקים מבחינה מתמטית, או
קשים מדי בכיתה ז', אז אני רק נותנת את
:הכלל
II ואז נותנת להם .
טיפ כדי לזכור את
הכלל:
.שלילי כפול שלילי = מספר חיובי
טיפ: "האויב
של האויב שלי
הוא חבר שלי".
:מורה ו'
I ציר הליכה על עםשאלה ב. אני מתחילה
רגיל לגבי הת מספרים, 4 3 ? :
II ואז נותנת את .
המסקנה:III ואחר כך אני מבקשת מהם לזהות את .
ולהשלים בעזרתה סדרת תרגילים:החוקיות
החיפושית הלכה בניגוד לכיוון החץ והגיעה
חיפושית ה. בכל דקה עברה 0למספר
שלושה קטעי יחידה. באיזו נקודה היא היתה
דקות? 4לפני
מסקנה: שלילי
כפול שלילי =
.מספר חיובי
בעינייך אצל כל מורה, ומה את לא אוהבת?מוצא חן מה .א
נסי לבנות את המהלך האולטימטיבי מבחינתך כדי להסביר למה שלילי כפול שלילי זה מספר .ב
חיובי. את יכולה להעזר בהסברים שנתנו המורות, לשנות בהם מה שאת רוצה, או להוסיף משל
עצמך.
איך מהלך כמו זה שהצעת עובד בכיתה? .ג
.שטח עיגולהנוסחה להנושא האחרון שבו אני רוצה להתמקד הוא . 12
Appendix – Interview items | 176
הנוסחה לשטח עיגול למה שוב, אשמח אם נוכל לעבור על כמה תשובות שקיבלתי ממורות לגבי האם ואיך להראות
:2rהיא rשרדיוסו
:מורה ז'
Iכל . מהניסיון שלי, כמעט
התלמידים בכיתה ז' מכירים את
הנוסחה. בשלב הזה של השנה
אני כבר לחוצה בזמן, אז אני רק
מזכירה את הכלל:
שטח העיגול הוא 2r
:מורה ח'
I איך מקבלים את . אני מראה
הנוסחה על ידי חלוקה של
העיגול לגזרות והרכבה של
"מלבן":
II . אני מראה איך מקבלים את אח"כ
הנוסחה על ידי חלוקה של העיגול לפסים
והרכבה של "משולש":
III רושמת על הלוח את . ואז
:המסקנה
מסקנה: שטח העיגול הוא
2r
:מורה ט'
I . אני מזכירה לתלמידים את
הנוסחה:II . אח"כ מראה שהנוסחה נותנת תוצאה
שקרובה מאד לתוצאה בחישוב
:אינטואיטיבי
III ואז מראה איך מקבלים את .
הנוסחה על ידי חלוקה של
העיגול לגזרות והרכבה של
"מלבן":
שטח העיגול הוא 2r
ס"מ. מה שטחו? 3נתון מעגל שקוטרו
דרך א': 2 2
1.5 1.5 3.14 7.069
-דרך ב': שטח העיגול הוא כ7
משטח הריבוע, 9
לכן הוא בקירוב7 2
9 3 7 .
מוצא חן בעינייך אצל כל מורה, ומה את לא אוהבת?מה .א
. את יכולה 2rנסי לבנות את המהלך האולטימטיבי מבחינתך כדי להסביר למה שטח עיגול זה .ב
להעזר בהסברים שנתנו המורות, לשנות בהם מה שאת רוצה, או להוסיף משל עצמך.
איך מהלך כמו זה שהצעת עובד בכיתה? .ג
177 | List of publications
List of publications
Refereed Conference Proceedings
Silverman, B., & Even, R. (2014). Modes of reasoning in Israeli 7th grade mathematics
textbook explanations. In K. Jones, C. Bokhove, G. Howson, & L. Fan (Eds.),
Proceedings of the International Conference on Mathematics Textbook Research and
Development (ICMT-2014) (pp. 427–432).
Silverman, B., & Even, R. (2015). Textbook explanations: Modes of reasoning in 7th grade
Israeli mathematics textbooks. In K. Krainer & N. Vondrová (Eds.), CERME 9 - Ninth
Congress of the European Society for Research in Mathematics Education (pp. 205–
212). Prague, Czech Republic: Charles University in Prague, Faculty of Education
and ERME. Retrieved from https://hal.archives-ouvertes.fr/hal-01281094
Silverman, B., & Even, R. (2016a). Paths of justification in Israeli 7th grade mathematics
textbooks. In E. Naftaliev & N. Adin (Eds.), Proceedings of the 4th Jerusalem
Conference on Research in Mathematics Education (pp. 52–54). Jerusalem, Israel.
(Hebrew version of 2016b).
Silverman, B., & Even, R. (2016b). Paths of Justification in Israeli 7th grade mathematics
textbooks. In C. Csíkos, A. Rausch, & J. Szitányi (Eds.), Proceedings of the 40th
Conference of the International Group for the Psychology of Mathematics Education
(Vol. 4, pp. 203–210). Szeged, Hungary: PME.